Home

SMG-700 User's Guide V1.00 (Nov 2004)

1. LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to configure settings Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway to which you want to send the traffic that the system receives from this PVC Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation VPI Type the Virtual Path Identifier for this routed PVC VCI Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for this routed PVC IP Enter the subscriber s CPE WAN IP address in dotted decimal notation NetMask The bit number of the subnet mask of the subscriber s WAN IP address To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary and add all of the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1 s in binary There are three 255 s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 Make sure that the routed PVC s subnet does not include the IP DSLAM s IP address IPQos Profile Select an IPQoS profile to classify and prioritize application traffic flowing through this PVC Use the Basic Settings gt xDSL Profiles Setup gt IPQos Profile screen to configure IPQoS profiles See Section 17 2 on page 119 Encap Select an encapsulation method llc or vc for this PVC Add Click Add to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to t
2. the IP DSLAM Table 81 SNMPv2 Traps TRAP NAME DESCRIPTION coldStart This trap is sent when the IP DSLAM is turned on warmStart This trap is sent when the IP DSLAM restarts linkDown This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down Enterprise specific xdslXtucLos traps are sent when an xDSL link is down linkUp This trap is sent when the Ethernet or xDSL link comes up reboot This trap is sent when the system is going to reboot The variable is the reason for the system reboot overheat This trap is sent when the system is overheated The variable is the current system temperature in Celsius overheatOver This trap is sent when the system is no longer overheated The variable is the current system temperature in Celsius fanRpmLow This trap is sent when the RPM of the fan is too low The variable is the current RPM of the fan fanRpmNormal This trap is sent when the RPM of the fan is back within the normal range The variable is the current RPM of the fan voltageOutOfRange This trap is sent when the voltage of the system is out of the normal range The variable is the current voltage of the system in volts voltageNormal This trap is sent when the voltage of the system is back within the normal range The variable is the current voltage of the system in volts extAlarminputTrigger This trap is sent when there is an external alarm input extAlarmInputRelease This trap is sent when th
3. VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 16 xDSL Port Setup 16 5 DSL Standards Overview These are the DSL standards and rates that the IP DSLAM supports at the time of writing The actual transfer rates will vary depending on what the subscriber s device supports the line conditions and the connection distance Table 18 DSL Standards Maximum Transfer Rates STANDARD MAXIMUM DOWNSTREAM MAXIMUM UPSTREAM 8a b c d 85 Mbps 18 Mbps 12a b 85 Mbps 50 Mbps 17a 100 Mbps 50 Mbps ADSL2 24 Mbps 1 Mbps 16 6 Downstream and Upstream Downstream refers to traffic going out from the IP DSLAM to the subscriber s DSL modem or router Upstream refers to traffic coming into the IP DSLAM from the subscriber s DSL modem or router 16 7 Configured Versus Actual Rate You configure the maximum rate of an individual DSL port by modifying its profile see Chapter 17 on page 117 or assigning the port to a different profile see Section 16 9 1 on page 106 However due to noise and other factors on the line the actual rate may not reach the maximum that you specify Even though you can specify arbitrary numbers using the Edit Profile screen the actual rate is always a multiple of 32 Kbps If you enter a rate that is not a multiple of 32 Kbps the actual rate will be the next lower multiple of 32Kbps For instance if you specify 60 Kbps for a port the actual rate for that port will not exceed 3
4. VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 7 Introducing the Web Configurator VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Initial Configuration This chapter describes initial configuration for the IP DSLAM See Chapter 54 on page 283 for various default settings of the IP DSLAM 8 1 Initial Configuration Overview This chapter shows what you first need to do to provide service to VDSL subscribers Switch IP Setup steps 1 3 e VDSL Port Setup steps 4 8 Save the Changes steps 9 10 8 2 Initial Configuration This chapter uses the web configurator for initial configuration See chapters 53 68 for information on the commands Use Internet Explorer 6 and later versions with JavaScript enabled 1 Log in to the web configurator See Section 7 3 on page 61 for instructions 2 Inthe navigation panel click Basic Setting IP Setup The IP Setup screen appears Figure 26 IP Setup IET Ethemet IP 192 168 1 3 IP mask 255 255 255 0 VLAN ID TREE Priority o y Outband IP 192 168 0 3 IP mask 255 255 255 0 Apply IP setting Cancel Default Gateway 192 168 1 254 Apply Gateway setting Cancel The Ethernet IP address default is 192 168 1 1 is a management IP of the IP DSLAM you can access from the uplink ports The Outband IP address default is 192 168 0 1 is another management IP you can access through the MGMT port VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 8 Initial Configu
5. IP DSLAM Computer Notebook computer N Server VDSL CPE Router Telephone Switch Internet Network e VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide F5 Safety Warnings Safety Warnings gt For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY power wires of the appropriate wire gauge see Chapter 54 on page 283 for details for your device Connect it to a power supply of the correct voltage see Chapter 54 on page 283 for details Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution If the power adaptor or cord is damaged
6. 275 Sort The Sy Sor PWR LED Does Not TIEFE OM rar d a D ERE DO a ae 275 nos Ine DENIS GU surta a bua dr vp Bak at ad keen 275 53 SFP LAK LEDS Do Not TIO Nai is 276 POOF OO LEDS Do Noi DUE XT acus M dag in prd da Pc a pe RO HIER RR da cR Rs 276 53 5 100 1000 Ethernet Port Data Transmission Jusceeoseaut orci aueh ebd ea Ie epu da RR idas asas 276 ER DSL Data Tas His INI o o o 277 ho There ls No Voice on an VDSL COMISI N usos usar center grobe bates lenia 277 Seo LOCAL SMA iia 278 Vom A i 278 E ota cc den de Redes aa taD Rd Erat Puig FOR a 278 de PGBS P 278 Ad muse LOE OU rr beo pa adi aoo ai ppp bep e ong o RR d 279 scum eet m 279 MUNI IM 279 09 19 Reseting is Dolas oa iia ais 280 5415 1 Resetting ihe Defaults Via Command users 280 53 15 2 Uploading the Default Configuration File eeeeeeeeenen 281 63 16 Recovering the FUMAS adas olle dapes aal Caen d aa a 282 Chapter 54 lisi ecd ci 283 A Physical ATC UNS sisareni 283 SORAR a austin deri Cop dade ra ond AT E Ea Odd kc dux dae usu aic nae td a Nd aie 285 DET ED PASSION sido 287 54 3 1 Hardware Telco 50 Connector Pin Assignments sss 287 54 3 2 Console Cable Pin Assignrmenls cinc rc cr a nana 287 544 ALARM Connector Pin POSH M
7. Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds MAX Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field identifies the Ethernet port Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher prior
8. VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 32 PPPoA to PPPoE Table 65 PPPoA to PPPoE continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click this to add or save channel settings on the selected port This saves your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Show Port Select which xDSL port s for which to display PPPoA to PPPoE conversion settings Index This field displays the number of the PVC Click a PVC s index number to open the screen where you can look at the current status of this PPPoA to PPPoE conversion See Section 32 3 on page 191 Note At the time of writing you cannot edit the VPI and VCI If you want to change them add a new PVC with the desired settings Then delete any unwanted PVCs Port This field displays the number of the xDSL port on which the PVC is configured VPI VCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port PVID This is the PVID Port VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this channel Priority This is the priority value 0 to 7 added to incoming frames without a
9. ED Di Py DT DT PVC Port 1 E VPI lo vol lo IPQos Profile DEFVAL y Encap llc y S tag VID 1 1 4094 S tag Priority o be C tag VID 1 1 4094 C tag Priority 0v Apply Cancel Show Port fail y Index Port VPIMCI SVID S Pri C VID C Pri IPQos Profile Encap Select Delete Select A None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 DT PVC LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to set up a DT PVC This field is read only once you click on a port number below VPI Type the Virtual Path Identifier for a channel on this port VCI Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for a channel on this port IPQos Profile Select an IPQoS profile to classify and prioritize application traffic flowing through thi DT PVC Use the Basic Setting gt xDSL Profiles Setup gt IPQos Profile screen to configure IPQoS profiles See Section 17 2 on page 119 7 Encap Select an encapsulation method Ile or vc for this DT PVC S tag VID Enter the S tag VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 The S tag service tag is the outer tag in double tagging S tag Priority Enter the S tag priority level from 0 to 7 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 35 Double Tagging DT Table 72 DT PVC LABEL DESCRIPTION C tag VID Enter the C tag VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 The C tag customer tag is the inner tag in double tagging
10. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol This chapter introduces the Spanning Tree Protocol STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP 26 1 RSTP and STP RSTP adds rapid reconfiguration capability to STP The IP DSLAM supports RSTP and the earlier STP RSTP and STP detect and break network loops and provide backup links between switches bridges or routers They allow a device to interact with other RSTP or STP aware devices in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The Integrated Ethernet Switch uses RSTP by default but can still operate with STP switches although without RSTP s benefits The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port It is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached The slower the media the higher the cost as illustrated in the following table Table 48 Path Cost LINK SPEED RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED ALLOWED RANGE Path Cost 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535 Path Cost 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535 Path Cost 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535 Path Cost 1Gbps 4 3 to 10 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Gbps 2 1105 1 to 65535 On each bridge the root port is the port through which this bridge communicates with the root It is the port on this Integrated Ethernet Switch with the lowest
11. VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 32 PPPoA to PPPoE Table 66 PPPoA to PPPoE Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION PPPoE PADO This field displays the number of pado PDUs sent by the BRAS to the IP DSLAM PPPoE PADR This field displays the number of padr PDUs sent by the IP DSLAM to the BRAS PPPoE PADS This field displays the number of pads PDUs sent by the BRAS to the IP DSLAM PPPoE PADT This field displays the number of padt PDUs sent and received by the IP DSLAM PPPoE Service Name Error This field displays the number of service name errors for example the IP DSLAM s specified service is different than the BRAS s setting PPPoE AC System Error This field displays the number of times the access concentrator experienced an error while performing the Host request for example when resources are exhausted in the access concentrator This value does not include the number of times the IP DSLAM checks the AC name field in the BRAS s reply PDU and finds a mismatch however PPPoE Generic Error This field displays the number of other types of errors that occur in the PPPoE session between the IP DSLAM and the BRAS VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 32 PPPoA to PPPoE VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide DSCP This chapter shows you how to set up DSCP on each port and how to convert DSCP values to IEEE 802 1p values 33 1 DSCP Overview DiffServ Code Point DSCP
12. End IP Enter the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses to which you want this IGMP filter profile to allow access If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start IP and End IP fields Add Click Add to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again 21 8 IGMP Port Group Screen Use this screen to display the current list of multicast groups each port joins To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IGMP gt Port Group Figure 74 IGMP Port Group ISA NITED Status Bandwidth Bandwidth Port Config Filter Port Group Port Info Count Setup Show Port l Port VID Multicast IP Source IP Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 IGMP Port Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Show Port Select a port for which you wish to view information Port This field shows each port number VID This field shows the associated VLAN ID Multicast IP This field shows the IP address of the multicast group joined by this port Source IP This field shows the IP address of the client that joined the multicast group on this port Refresh Click Refre
13. Tx jabber This field shows the number of frames transmitted that were longer than 1518 octets non VLAN or 1522 octets VLAN and contained an incorrect FCS value Tx oversize This field shows the number of frames transmitted that were bigger than 1518 octets non VLAN or 1522 VLAN and contained a valid FCS packet lt 64 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 64 octets or less in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits packet 65 127 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 65 to 127 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits packet 128 255 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 128 to 255 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 9 Home and Port Statistics Screens Table 6 Port Statistics Ethernet continued LABEL DESCRIPTION packet 256 511 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 256 to 511 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits packet 512 1023 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 512 to 1023 octets in length this includes FCS octets but
14. The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may Set Interval change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt polling statistics Previous Page Next Page Click one of these buttons to show the preceding following screen if the information cannot be displayed in one screen VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide E Chapter 19 VLAN 19 4 Static VLAN Setting Screen You can assign a port to be a member of a VLAN group or prohibit a port from joining a VLAN group in this screen This is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application VLAN Static VLAN Setting Figure 64 Static VLAN Setting VLAN Status 1 Active ED Static VLAN Setting ng Static VLAN Settings VLAN Port Setting VID Active Name A RV VLAN ID o 1 4094 Port Control Tagging Select All Select All Select an _None ENET1 Fixed C Forbidden Tx Tagging ENET2 Fixed C Forbidden Tx Tagging 1 Fixed Forbidden Tx Tagging 2 Fixed C Forbidden FT Tx Tagging 3 Fixed C Forbidden Tx Tagging 4 e C Forbidden D j eS oO Fortin a mag Rn rio didi nidi Name Delete DEFAULT Tr The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Static VLAN Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Click the number to edit the
15. Bridge MIBs RFC 1493 2674 SMI RFC 1155 Private MIBs RFC 3728 VDSL MIB VDSL2 to ADSL2 Fall Back The IP DSLAM provides ADSL2 fall back feature in addition to the VDSL2 PTM Packet Transmission Mode service With ADSL2 fall back turned on the IP DSLAM can detect an ADSL modem connected to a subscriber line Then the IP DSLAM switches the operation mode of the corresponding port to ADSL2 and establishes the corresponding connection ser vice This helps Telco operators to provide differentiating services ADSL service can coexist with VDSL service on the same subscriber line using a single DSLAM At the time of writ ing the IP DSLAM supports the following features ADSL2 fall back Bi directional AAL5 ATM VCs PPPoA and IPoA IPoE PVC to VLAN mapping Refer to ITU T G 992 1 G 992 3 and G 992 5 for more information IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Your management IP DSLAM card uses the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Virtual Local Area Network which allows your device to deliver tagged untagged frames to and from its ports IEEE 802 1p Priority Your IP DSLAM uses IEEE 802 1p Priority to assign priority levels to individual PVCs IGMP Count Limit You can limit the number of IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join You may enable disable the IGMP count limit on individual ports Static Multicast Use static multicast to allow incoming frames based on multicast MAC address es that you specify This feature can be used
16. CLEARABLE DESCRIPTION dsl 5000 Line up info V The DSL link is up dsl 5001 line_down info V The DSL link is down dsl 5002 vdsl tca lol info V The number of times a Loss Of Link has occurred within 15 minutes for the XTUC has reached the threshold dsl 5003 vdsl tca lof info V The number of times a Loss Of Frame has occurred within 15 minutes for the XTU C or R has reached the threshold dsl 5004 vdsl_tca_los info V The number of times a Loss Of Signal has occurred within 15 minutes for the XTU C or R has reached the threshold VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 48 Alarm Table 106 Alarm Descriptions continued ALARM CONDITION SEVERITY CLEARABLE DESCRIPTION dsl 5005 vdsl_tca_lop info V The number of times a Loss Of Power has occurred within 15 minutes for the XTU C or R has reached the threshold dsl 5006 vdsl tca es info V The number of error seconds within 15 minutes for the XTU C or R has reached the threshold dsl 5007 vdsl tca ses info V The number of severely errored seconds within 15 minutes for the XTU C or R has reached the threshold dsl 5008 vdsl tca uas info V The number of unavailable error seconds within 15 minutes for the XTU C or R has reached the threshold eqpt 10000 vol err critical The input voltage Vn is lower than the low threshold or hig
17. VPI Type the Virtual Path Identifier for a channel on this port VCI Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for a channel on this port IPQos Profile Select an IPQoS profile to classify and prioritize application traffic flowing through this PVC Use the Basic Setting gt xDSL Profiles Setup gt IPQos Profile screen to configure IPQoS profiles See Section 17 2 on page 119 Encap Select an encapsulation method llc or vc for this PVC PVID Type a PVID Port VLAN ID to assign to untagged frames received on this channel Note Make sure the VID is not already used for multicast VLAN or TLS PVC Priority Use the drop down list box to select the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag AC Name This field is optional Specify the hostname of a remote access concentrator if there are two access concentrators or BRAS on the network or if you want to allow PAE translation to the specified access concentrator In this case the IP DSLAM checks the AC name field in the BRAS s reply PDU If there is a mismatch the IP DSLAM drops this PDU This is not recorded as an PPPoE AC System Error in the PPPoA to PPPoE Status screen however Service Name This field is optional Specify the name of the service that uses this PVC This must be a service name that you configure on the remote access concentrator Hello Time Specify the timeout in seconds for the PPPoE session Enter 0 if there is no timeout
18. s xDSL port in the XDSL Port Setting screen see Section 16 9 1 on page 106 The top of the screen displays the configured IGMP filter profiles Use the bottom part of the screen with the Add and Cancel buttons to add or edit alarm profiles Figure 73 IGMP Filter Profile ED IGMP Filter NN Status Bandwidth Bandwidth Port Config Filter Port Group Port Info Count Setup Index Name Delete 1 DEFVAL oO Delete Name 1 Start IP 0 0 0 0 End IP 0 0 0 0 2 Start IP 0 0 0 0 End IP 0 0 0 0 3 Start IP 0 0 0 0 End IP 0 0 0 0 A l The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 IGMP Filter Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the number of the IGMP filter profile Click a profile s index number to edit the profile You cannot edit the DEFVAL profile Name This name identifies the IGMP filter profile VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 21 IGMP Table 38 IGMP Filter Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Select the Delete check box and click Delete to remove an IGMP filter profile You cannot delete the DEFVAL profile Name Type a name to identify the IGMP filter profile you cannot change the name of the DEFVAL profile You can use up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are not allowed Start IP Enter the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses to which you want this IGMP filter profile to allow access
19. 28 2 Port Security Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Port Security Figure 89 Port Security A Port Security g Port Enable Limited Number of Learned MAC Address 1 m a129 2 m 5 1 128 3 m 5 a129 4 O 5 8 Apply Cancel copyport 1 y Paste The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Port Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays a port number Enable Select this check box to restrict the number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port Clear this check box to not limit the number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port Limited Number of Specify how many MAC addresses the IP DSLAM can learn on this port The Learned MAC range is 1 128 Address Note If you also use MAC filtering on a port it is recommended that you set this limit to be equal to or greater than the number of MAC filter entries you configure VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 28 Port Security Table 54 Port Security continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Copy port Do the following to copy set
20. A 249 a L E A A orden E A t RON ER dada a le Madan stun died cadit dE ans T s Uds da pa ids 251 MENTENaNCS e 259 Bee poet bs ie perenne ent mere cre errr tte reenter errr Tree Terre terre rr ere rer Tree reer en 263 Mit WL MET em 269 ARP TAS e 271 Troubleshooting and Specifications esses eese nennen nennen nnn 273 iste icri e R 275 Product aA NING isinsin a a MUR a ORE afe E EN 283 Pinot ANG IGOR O 289 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents Fer M25 eee 8 e ne I s 3 Document GONvVentio NS ici tases tease ieiettcaceds ces ordetedsedacloudheaioesenswes 4 c lik A ee ee ean eee ene nee ee eee 6 CONTE Os das 9 VAL A a e el arc SEO 11 List oft A eee oier aiadoa aiaa n aaaeaii aseeni 23 Listor Tables TT T E m e 27 Part I Introduction 1e eeeeeeeeeeee eese nnnn anna amena au aa au annua 31 Chapter 1 Introducing the IP DSLAM A 33 WA CI TET A EEA CIT 33 el ia o m e T CT EE 33 ToS NC Pare AGI A 33 EAE ae cire Je a We m E 34 T AROS A A pa ese ota Fev toS ot a 35 e E EA 36 Chapter 2 Hardware Instala oO is 41 2 1 General Installation Instructions mini canas 41 2 e Dusi n sto eii Ai id 41 23 Installation O dd 42 223 1 Desktop Installation POCOS e
21. ADSL 226 PPPoE intermediate agent 226 VDSL 174 226 TR 101 format for ADSL 174 trademarks 293 transmission error correction 99 118 transmission statistics Ethernet port 75 Transparent LAN Service see TLS trap 223 Trellis Encoding 126 troubleshooting 275 DSL data transmission 277 firmware recovery 282 SYS LED not turn on 275 system lockout 279 trunking example 238 Tx bytes 79 Tx discard packets 78 Tx nonuni packets 78 Tx packets 78 79 Tx rate 79 Tx uni packets 78 U UnAvailable Seconds UAS 128 undersize 76 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Index unit of fan speed 83 untag VLAN ID 137 up shift SNR 118 up time port 74 System 73 UPBO 102 upgrading firmware 259 upstream broadcast rate limiting 39 definition 104 impulse noise protection 126 interval delay 126 upstream and downstream statistics 74 Upstream Power Back Off see UPBO user accounts management 87 USER port 52 USER Telco 50 connectors 287 V VC Virtual Channels 112 VC Virtual Circuit 113 VC Mux 113 VCI Virtual Circuit Identifier 79 VDSL band plan 36 limit PSD mask 101 line operating values 125 profile 36 VDSL2 profiles 101 ventilation holes 44 VID see VLAN ID viewing system information 81 viewing system logs 263 VLAN 37 276 277 forwarding 134 introduction 133 isolation 38 priority frame 133 stacking 39 VLAN group 133 VLAN ID 133 maximum number of 133 VLAN stacking 197 voltage 82 thresho
22. CBS CBS is Committed Burst Size Enter the maximum packet size 3072 65536 bytes guaranteed to flow through this device all the time You must enter the num ber which is a multiple of 256 See Section 17 2 on page 119 for more information Note The CBS should be equal or less than PBS in a queue Level Enter the priority level 077 for each queue 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Weight Enter the queue weight 17127 for each queue The IP DSLAM services queues based on their priority level and queue weight rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied Add Click Add to save what you configured in this screen and creates an IPQoS profile shown in the first section of the screen Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again 17 3 Alarm Profile Screen Alarm profiles define VDSL port alarm thresholds The IP DSLAM sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when the thresholds of the alarm profile are exceeded To open this screen click Basic Setting gt xDSL Profiles Setup gt Alarm Profile Use the top part of the screen with the Add and Cancel buttons to add or edit alarm profiles The rest of the screen displays the conf
23. First the DSL devices establish a virtual circuit Then the local device sends an ATM F5 cell to be returned by the remote DSL device both DSL devices must support ATM F5 in order to use this test The results Passed or Failed display in the multi line text box LDM Test Select a port number from the Port drop down list box and click Set LDM Port to have the IP DSLAM perform line diagnostics on the specified port The xDSL port must have a connection It takes about one minute for the line diagnostics to finish The screen displays a message confirming upon which DSL port line diagnostics will be performed Click Get LDM Data to display the line diagnostics results after using the Set LDM Port button on an DSL port Use the line diagnostics results to analyze problems with the physical xDSL line Click Get LDM Data raw to display the unformatted line diagnostics results Click Get LDM Data 992 3 to display the line diagnostics results in the format defined in the ITU T G 992 3 standard Note Wait at least one minute after using Set LDM Port before using Get LDM Data SELT Select a port number from the Port drop down list box and click Set SELT Port to perform a Single End Loop Test SELT on the specified port This test checks the distance to the subscriber s location Note The port must have an open loop There cannot be a DSL device phone fax machine or other device connected to the subscriber s end of
24. PADI packets MTU Size Use this screen to configure the Maximum Transmission Unit MTU for the Ethernet interfaces The Ethernet interfaces discard any packets larger than this OUI Filter Use this screen to block or forward packets from devices with the specified OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier in the MAC address N1MAC Use this screen to enable multiple to one MAC address conversion on specified port s Enables this on a port to have the IP DSLAM replace the DSL subscriber device s MAC address with the IP DSLAM s MAC address in upstream traffic flowing through the port So that the device on the Ethernet network behind the IP DSLAM only see and record the IP DSLAM s MAC address Dot3ad Use this screen to view and configure Ethernet link aggregation settings MACFF Use this screen to configure RFC 4562 MAC force forwarding rules for subscribers This has matched subscribers then send all traffic through an pre defined gateway which forwards or routes the subscriber traffic Routing Static Routing Use this screen to configure static routes A static route defines how the IP DSLAM should forward traffic by configuring the TCP IP parameters manually Alarm Alarm Status Use these screens to view the alarms that are currently in the system Alarm Event Setup Use these screens to view and set the severity levels of the alarms and where the system is to send them Alarm Port Setup Use this screen to set
25. Revolutions Per Minute 83 RSTP bridge priority 165 forwarding delay 165 Hello Time 165 maximum age 165 path cost 166 RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 38 Rx bytes 79 Rx discard packets 79 Rx nonuni packets 78 Rx packets 78 79 Rx rate 79 Rx uni packets 78 S safety warnings 6 saving configuration 67 screwdriver 44 secured client settings 224 security 38 SELT 40 SELT test 263 service access control settings 223 service port for remote management 223 Service Provider s Network SPN 197 sessions access control 219 coexisting 219 setting static routes 249 Severely Errored Seconds SES 128 SFP 35 SFP LNK LED troubleshooting 276 shared secret 89 168 signal attenuation LDM test parameter 266 ToneDiag parameter 267 Signal to Noise Ratio see SNR signal to noise ratio LDM test parameter 267 ToneDiag parameter 268 signal to noise ratio margin LDM test parameter 266 ToneDiag parameter 267 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP Single End Loop Test see SELT Small Form factor Pluggable see SFP SNMP 219 configuring 222 get community 222 manager 220 MIBs 221 set community 222 supported versions 219 trap community 222 traps 221 SNMP access control 219 SNMP commands 220 Get 220 GetNext 220 Set 220 traps 220 SNMP trap fans 83 SNMPv2 traps 221 SNR 118 specification ground wire 283 telephone wire 283 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Index speed mode 97 splitter 35
26. Table 12 Switch Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Anti Spoofing Select this to have the IP DSLAM detect whether a MAC address is connected to more than one port Priority Queue IEEE 802 1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC Assignment layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port Use the next two fields to configure the priority level to physical queue mapping Priority 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Priority 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Priority 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Priority 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Priority 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Priority 2 This is for spare bandwidth Priority 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Priority 0 Typically used for best effort traffic Tag Protocol Identifier Enter a 4 digit prot
27. Type This field displays pppoaoe when the connected subscriber uses PPPoE or PPPoA for the xDSL connection ipoa or ipoe displays when the subscriber uses IPoA or IPoE for the connection PPP Session ID IP This field displays a PPP session identifier when using PPPoA or PPPoE or an IP address when using IPoA or IPoE the IP DSLAM uses to recognize the original subscriber s MAC address The IP DSLAM puts the subscriber s MAC address back into traffic returned from the uplink network MAC This field displays a MAC address which has been replaced with the IP DSLAM s MAC address in upstream frames VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 44 NTMAC VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Dot3ad 45 1 Aggregation Switch Mode IEEE 802 3ad link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group The IP DSLAM supports both static and dynamic link aggregation BS You don t have available ports after you aggregate the two Ethernet ports on the IP DSLAM BES In a properly planned network it is recommended to implement static link aggregation only This ens
28. VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Gigabit Interface Converter transceiver Chapter 3 Front Panel Connections 3 1 2 Front Panel LEDs The following table describes the LED indicators on the front panel of the IP DSLAM Table 2 LED Descriptions LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION PWR Green On The power is turned on Off The power is off SYS Green Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests On The system is on and functioning properly Off The system is not ready malfunctioning ALM Red On There is a hardware failure or a critical alarm such as ALM input Off The system is functioning normally 1000 100 1 2 Yellow On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Blinking The link is transmitting receiving 100 Mbps Ethernet traffic Off The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is down Green On The link to a 1000 Mbps 1Gbps Ethernet network is up Blinking The link is transmitting receiving 1000 Mbps 1Gbps Ethernet traffic Off The link to a 1000 Mbps 1Gbps Ethernet network is down SFP 1 2 LNK Green On The link to a 1000 Mbps 1 Gbps Ethernet network is up Off There is not a link to a 1000 Mbps 1 Gbps Ethernet network or the 1000 Mbps network link is down SFP 1 2 ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving Ethernet traffic Off The system is not transmitting receiving Ethernet traffic 3 2 1000 100M Auto Sensing Ethernet
29. click Advanced Application gt DHCP Snoop Figure 94 DHCP Snoop C DHCP Snoop DHCP Snoop DHCP Snoop Status DHCP Counter Port 1 y Active Ci Static IP 1 0 0 0 0 Static IP 2 0 0 0 0 Static IP 3 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel Port Active Static IP Pool yl s a 2 a gt 3 5 2 N A O la ls d VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 30 DHCP Snoop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 DHCP Snoop LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays each xDSL port number Click a port to bring the setting on the first section of the screen Active Specify whether DHCP snooping is active V or inactive on this port Static IP 1 3 These fields are only effective when DHCP snooping is active Enter up to three IP addresses for which the IP DSLAM should forward packets even if the IP address is not assigned by the DHCP server The IP DSLAM drops packets from other unknown IP addresses on this port To delete an existing IP address enter 0 0 0 0 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Port This field displays each xDSL port number Click a port number to edit it in the
30. excludes framing bits packet 1024 1518 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 1024 to 1518 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits packet 1522 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 1519 to 1522 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits packet total This field shows the total number of received and transmitted packets broadcast total This field shows the total number of received and transmitted broadcast frames multicast total This field shows the total number of received and transmitted multicast frames octet total This field shows the total number of received and transmitted octets unicast multicast and broadcast Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may Clear Counter Set Interval change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt system statistic polling Port Select a port from the Port drop down list box and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port Reset Click this to set the Poll Interval s and Port fields to their default values and to refresh the screen 9 1 2 VDSL Port Statistics Screen Use this screen to displ
31. section above Active This field displays whether DHCP snooping is active V or inactive on this port Static IP Pool These fields display IP addresses for which the IP DSLAM should forward packets even if the IP address is not assigned by the DHCP server displays for a blank value 30 3 DHCP Snoop Status Screen Use this screen to look at or to clear the DHCP snooping table on each port To open this screen click Advanced Application DHCP Snoop DHCP Snoop Status Figure 95 DHCP Snoop Status DHCP Snoop OW Snoop Status DHCP Snoop Status DHCP Counter Show Port All y Port Overflow VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 30 DHCP Snoop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 DHCP Snoop Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Show Port Select a port for which you wish to view information Port This field displays the selected xDSL port number s Overflow There is a limit to the number of IP addresses the DHCP server can assign at one time to each port This field displays the number of requests from DHCP clients above this limit Overflow requests are dropped by the IP DSLAM IP This field displays the IP address assigned to a client on this port MAC This field displays the MAC address of a client on this port to which the DHCP server assigned an IP address VID This field displays the VLAN ID if any on the DHCP Request pac
32. tone 0032 0047 00 07 tone 0048 0063 09 09 tone 0064 0079 Oa Oa tone 0080 0095 Oa Oa tone 0096 0111 Oa Oa tone 0112 0127 Oa Oa tone 0128 0143 Oa 159 00 00 07 09 Da Da Da Da Line Performance oo 00 oo 00 08 08 Da 09 Da Oa Da Oa Da Oa Da Oa Line Statistics 00 00 00 oo 00 00 08 08 08 Da 09 0a Da OalOa Da Oalda Da OalOa Ob OalOa a Oa Ob Oa Oa OalOa a a DS carrier load number of bits per symbol tone oo 00 00 oo 00 00 08 09 09 Oa Oa 09 Oa Oa Oa Oa Oa Oa Oa Oa Oa Oa Oa Oa a Da The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 xDSL Line Data 00 00 09 Da Da Da Da Da 00 Do D9 Da Da Da Da Da Refresh oo oo D9 Da Da Da Da Da Da 0 oo 09 Oa Da Da Da Da LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to view information Refresh Click Refresh to display updated information Port Name This section displays the name of the DSL port Port Status This field displays the current status link_up or link_down of the DSL port Bit Allocation DSX carrier load displays the number of bits transmitted per DMT tone for the downstream channel from the IP DSLAM to the subscriber s DSL modem or router USX carrier load displays the number of bits received per DMT tone for the upstream channel from the subscriber s DSL modem or router to the IP DSLAM 18 3 xDSL Perfo
33. 0 XTUR 0 0 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 xDSL Performance LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to view information Refresh Click Refresh to display updated information Port Name This section displays the name of the DSL port Performance since last link up Line Type Fast stands for non interleaved fast mode and Interleaved stands for interleaved mode Init This field displays the number of link ups and link downs XTUC XTUR ES The Number of Errored Seconds transmitted downstream or received upstream on this DSL port XTUC XTUR The Number of Severely Errored Seconds transmitted downstream or SES received upstream on this DSL port Severely errored seconds contained 30 or more errored blocks or at least one defect This is a subset of the Down Up Stream ES One MR The downstream or upstream number of UnAvailable Seconds UA VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 18 xDSL Line Data Table 28 xDSL Performance continued LABEL DESCRIPTION XTUC XTUR This is the number of times the DSL line s upstream connection has LPR experienced a Loss of power XTUC XTUR These are the DSL line s downstream and upstream numbers of Loss of frame LOFS Seconds XTUC XTUR These are the DSL line s downstream and upstream numbers of Loss of signal
34. 5 1 No limit No limit 40 3 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices SNMP is a member of TCP IP protocol suite A manager station can manage and monitor the IP DSLAM through the network via SNMP version one SNMPv1 and or SNMP version 2c The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 40 Access Control Figure 119 SNMP Management Model AGENT AGENT Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device the IP DSLAM An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device Examples of variables include such as number of packets received node port status etc A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these obj
35. 55A User s Guide Chapter 8 Initial Configuration VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Home and Port Statistics Screens This chapter describes the Home status and Port Statistics screens 9 1 Home Screen The Home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details To open this screen click Home in any web configurator screen Figure 33 Home Poll Interval s 40 Home System Up Time O days 0 02 13 ENET Status 1 Up 2 Down xDSL Status 1 Down 2 Down 3 Down Port Name Media Duplex Up Time enet1 100copper full duplex D 0 56 enet2 MM Mode Up Down stream interleave Fast Up Time ads 2 9082 av ana B The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 5 Home LABEL DESCRIPTION System up Time This field shows how long the system has been running since the last time it was started The following fields are related to the Ethernet ports ENET This field displays the number of the Ethernet port Click a port number to display that port s statistics screen The Ethernet Port Statistics Screen appears See Section 9 1 1 on page 74 Status This field displays whether the Ethernet port is connected Up or not Down Port Name This field displays the name of the Ethernet port VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 9 Home and Port Statistics Screens Table 5 Hom
36. 62 2684 Routed Domain continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Index This field displays the number of the routed PVC Port This field displays the number of the xDSL port on which the routed PVC is configured VPI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port VCI This field displays the Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port IP This field displays the subscriber s IP address NetMask This field displays the bit number of the subnet mask of the subscriber s LAN IP address Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Clicking Delete saves your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again 31 4 RPVC Arp Proxy Screen Use this screen to view the Address Resolution Protocol table of IP addresses of
37. ADSL PVC This field is available if you clear the VDSL Frame Mode field Note The PVC must be a super channel see Section 16 11 on page 113 and the associated VLAN must be created first VID Specify a VLAN ID 14094 Ether Type Enter 4 digits in hexadecimal for Ethernet type which specify a protocol traffic For example 0806 is the Ethernet type 0x0806 for ARP Address Resolution Proto col traffic Priority Enter the priority level for the protocol VLAN 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Add Click Add to save the changes in this screen to the system s volatile memory The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the screen again The table in the bot tom half of the screen lists the VLANs that specific untagged traffic belongs to Index This is the index number of records in the table Port This field displays the port number for the specified VC VPI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier for the specified ADSL PVC VCI This field displays the Virtual Circuit Identifier for the specified ADSL PVC VID This field displays a VLAN VLAN ID to which a specific traffic will be assigned Ether Type This field displays Ethernet types to specify a cert
38. Alarm Profile Dervan y IGMP Filter Profile DEFVAL y IPQos Profile DEFVAL Y E Advanced Feature Optionmask Ox0000 RFI Band disable y Limit mask vas12_a_eu3z y SRA disable Up Stream s 0 5 160 0 1 DMT symbol pene Down Streams 0 5 160 0 1 DMT symbol C Enable Disable ESEL fo 0 1 270 0 108 A B UpStream 5650 4000 8095 1019 0 4095 UPBO Band 1 0 01dBm Hz 0 01dBm Hz UpStream sso 4000 8095 era q0 4095 Band 2 0 01dBm Hz 0 01dBm Hz Upstream fo q4000 8095 o 0 4095 Band 3 0 01dBm Hz 0 01dBm Hz C Enable Disable EPSD C psa co y Custom ESEL o 0 511 0 5dBm ESCMA 256 0 640 DPBO ESCMB s12 0 640 ESCMC 256 0 640 MUS 180 0 255 0 5dBmiHz FMIN 0 2048 4 3125kHz FMAX si 32 6958 4 3125kHz Show Result Mask RFI Custom Index Enable Start End 1 O o kHz lo kHz 2 ri o kHz o kHz 3 o kHz o kHz kHz Apply Cancel i VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 16 xDSL Port Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 xDSL Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Up Click this to return to the previous screen General Setup Active Select this check box to turn on this DSL port Customer Info Enter information to identify the subscriber connected to this DSL port You can use up to 31 printable ASCII characters including spaces and hyphens Customer Tel Enter information t
39. C tag Priority Enter the C tag priority level from O to 7 Apply Click Apply to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the IP DSLAM Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Show Port Select which xDSL port s for which to display DT PVC settings Index This field displays the number of the PVC Click a PVC s index number to use the top of the screen to edit the PVC Note At the time of writing you cannot edit the VPI and VCI If you want to change them add a new PVC with the desired settings Then you can delete any unwanted PVCs Port This field displays the number of the xDSL port on which the PVC is configured VPI VCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port S VID This is the S tag VLAN ID outer tag that adds to the untagged packets S Pri This is the S tag priority level that adds to the untagged packets C VID This is the C tag VLAN ID that adds to the untagged packets C Pri This is the C tag priority level that adds to the untagged packets IPQos Profile This field displays the IPQoS profile applied for this DT PVC Encap This field displays the encapsulation method lle or vc configured for the DT PVC Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Enable to activate Enable the en
40. CPE devices using 2684 routed mode and configure how long the device is to store them To open this screen click Advanced Application 2684 Routed Mode RPVC ARP Proxy Figure 100 RPVC Arp Proxy ULT Index Routed PVC Routed Domain RPVC ARP Proxy Routed Gateway Aging Time 600 10 10000 seconds O Disabled Apply Setting Gateway IP VID MAC Flush VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 31 2684 Routed Mode The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 RPVC Arp Proxy LABEL DESCRIPTION Aging Time Enter a number of seconds 10710000 to set how long the device keeps the Address Resolution Protocol table s entries of IP addresses of CPE devices using 2684 routed mode Enter 0 to disable the aging time Apply Setting Click Apply Setting to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Index This field displays the number of the IP address entry Gateway IP This field displays the IP address of the gateway to which the device sends the traffic that it receives from this entry s IP address VID This field displays the VLAN Identifier that the device adds to Ethernet frames that it sends to this gateway MAC This field displays the subscriber s MAC Media A
41. Chapter 42 MTU SIZE M 229 LI MEET e o M a 229 Chapter 43 OUI A aia 231 243 1 Xe Ji uc I em 231 Chapter 44 Lp oo 233 SCEGLI TT UT E OE AAA S E TON 233 AD NIMAG OCE ona a iaaa 233 44 3 NIMAC Status SEBA ds 234 Chapter 45 Dieler To T 237 451 sessuale Mode e m 237 A52 Dynamic Link A SO S o 0 T 287 A LIE Prts ccc DAE UT M 238 253 oae Aggregation Example ricas 238 dod DOES DOSE a OR D Na PE RR c abarca bl Fund uc cr din 238 45 5 Dotad Status Sercon jssccidardssscedediniasecadariapoeadadinasderadiniaseccdariuoseudaaiunsdededaiansseadaxiuaneoteainiase 239 Chapter 46 MAG Force style 241 O cop uu OR aS RP ERE RO RET ERES a oat ua p a aq A n n ian 241 48 2 MAG Force Forwarding Examples rores the biccactaasiacseanseticecenbsausaautiazadicaenimciveagaecase 242 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Table of Contents zi mH tle M e o 243 AB MACEFFARP PESOS SCION in ri Gon d da RR c edad 245 Part IV Routing Protocol Alarm and Management 247 Chapter 47 A 7 Mem 249 Chapter 48 C M V 9 7M A 251 38 1 AO asinus RV ROI E aa a RR AERA Mai Rab P a dua 251 AE CHUESCU Ei ra 251 48 3 Aann DescriplliDOS T
42. Force Forwarding Example IP Address Settings sss 242 Table 100 MAC Force FON pei 244 iEC qusNC ELUCET UR 245 Table 102 Altematiye Subnet Mask Notation serie titi 245 TABS TOS MAC ARP PIO aio 246 Nie a RENE TNT 249 E TS cwI tal dem aaa 252 BE TG Arm Sie iC ec PT 252 TA TO AOI ar cua D resa E tea Lasa teas ERU EUER E teed 254 Tabe 108 Alam Event SEU E 255 Table TS Alam Even Setup EC sir aa 256 Til TOAL Pon SSUP dada 257 Table TI Diagnoses cios E amenities 264 TS TI Loi FOE par d o SNR Rev cR A Eoo S Lam C Dant ouibus d S uda Po dua dd 265 BE qd crc ET TE E UM 265 Table 114 DIN Test Freaks sonata 266 Nis ENSE EI e METTI ii 267 TAS TIG MAC TADE ms 270 uri UNS ARF Tan Net t EN 272 Table 115 SYS LED TyoublaghoBNME surtir 275 Table TIO ALM LED Troubles ipOlIWg riada 275 TAE 120 SEP LNK LED Tels serio o ousithdahunoseiiabsiiin ddniiasteeduiasnencena 276 Table 121 1001000 LED Troupe Stig dial 276 Table 1224 Troubleshooting Data Trans MISSION siii 276 Table 123 DSL Data Transmission Troubleshooting cooccccnnncccnnncinnnonccnnonccnnnnncnnnnnrcnnana can nnaccnnnnannnns 277 Table T24 VDSL Volts TraubleshoolAS cari a 277 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide List of Tables Table 125 Troubleshooting a Local Sarei sa jade 278 Table 126 Troubleshooting the SO YN BIB ancla a 278 Table 127 Troubleshooting the IP DSLAM s Configured Settings ssssssssssseeee 278 Table 128 Troubleshooting Ihe SNMP SEVE
43. IEEE 802 1p priority tag Encap This field displays the encapsulation method lle or vc applied on the PPPoA to PPPoE conversion Hello Time This field displays the timeout for the PPPoE session in seconds IPQos Profile This field display the IPQoS profile applied on the PPPoA to PPPoE conversion Access Concentrator This field displays the name of the specified remote access concentrator if any Name Service Name This field displays the name of the service that uses this PVC on the remote access concentrator Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to Delete remove the entry Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table 32 3 PPPoA to PPPoE Status Screen Use this screen to look at the current status of each PPPoA to PPPoE conversion To open this screen click Advanced Application gt PPPoA to PPPoE and then click an index number VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 32 PPPoA to PPPoE Figure 104 PPPoA to PPPoE Status ED PPPoA to PPPoE Status PVC 10 8 35 E Session Status Session State Down Session ID 0 Session Uptime Osecs AC Name Service Name Counter Status Tx Rx PPP LCP Config Request 0 PPFP LCF Echo Request 0 PPP LCP Echo Reply 0 PPPoE PADI 0 E PPPoE PADO 0 PPPoE PADR 0 PPPoE PADS PPPoE PADT 0 PPPoE Service Name Error PPPoE AC System Error PPPo
44. IP address should not be in the same subnet as the one defined by the WAN IP address and netmask of the subscriber s device It is suggested that you set the netmask of the subscriber s WAN IP address to 32 to avoid this problem The IP DSLAM s management IP address should not be in the same subnet range of any RPVC and RPVC domain It will make the IP DSLAM confused if the IP DSLAMO receives a packet with this IP as destination IP The IP DSLAM s management IP address also should not be in the same subnet as the one defined by the LAN IP address and netmask of the subscriber s device Make sure you assign the IP addresses properly In general deployment the computer must set the CPE device s LAN IP address 10 10 10 10 in this example as its default gateway The subnet range of any RPVC and RPVC domain must be unique 31 2 2684 Routed PVC Screen Use this screen to configure PVCs for 2684 routed mode traffic To open this screen click Advanced Application gt 2684 Routed Mode VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 31 2684 Routed Mode Figure 98 2684 Routed PVC a SA Po OY Routed PVC Routed Domain RPVC ARP Proxy Routed Gateway Port fi Gateway IP 0 0 0 0 VPI o VCI 0 IP 0 0 0 0 NetMask o 1 32 IPQos Profile DEFVAL y Encap uc Add Cancel Index Port VPI VCI IP NetMask IPQos Profile Encap Gateway IP Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 2684 Routed PVC
45. Kbps for this profile Configure the maximum upstream transfer rate to be less than the maximum downstream transfer rate Min Rate Type the minimum upstream transfer rate 32 to 128000 Kbps for this port Configure the minimum upstream transfer rate to be less than the maximum upstream transfer rate Interleave Delay Configure this field if you set the Latency Mode field to Interleave Type the number of milliseconds 1 255 of interleave delay to use for upstream transfers It is recommended that you configure the same latency delay for both upstream and downstream Max SNR Type the maximum upstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Min SNR Type the minimum upstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Configure the minimum upstream signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the maximum upstream signal to noise margin Target SNR Type the target upstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Configure the target upstream signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the minimum upstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum upstream signal to noise margin Up Shift SNR The upstream up shift signal to noise margin 0 31 dB When the channel s signal to noise margin goes above this number the device can attempt to use a higher transfer rate Configure the upstream up shift signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the target upstream signal to noise margin and less
46. LOSS Seconds XTUC XTUR This is the DSL line s downstream number of Loss of link Seconds LOLS Interleaved In interleaved mode the number of Far End Block Errors Far End Cyclic FEBE Redundancy Checks Interleaved In interleaved mode the number of Near End Block Errors Near End Cyclic NEBE Redundancy Checks Interleaved In interleaved mode the Far End number of DSL frames repaired by Forward FEFEC Error Correction Interleaved In interleaved mode the Near End number of DSL frames repaired by Forward NEFEC Error Correction 15 min 1day history These sections of the screen display line performance statistics for the current and previous 15 minute periods as well as for the current and previous 24 hours lofs The number of Loss Of Frame Seconds that have occurred within the period loss The number of Loss Of Signal Seconds that have occurred within the period lols The number of Loss Of Link Seconds that have occurred within the period lprs The number of Loss of Power Seconds that have occurred within the period es The number of Errored Seconds that have occurred within the period init The number of successful initializations that have occurred within the period ses The number of Severely Errored Seconds that have occurred within the period uas The number of UnAvailable Seconds that have occurred within the period 18 4 xDSL Statistics Screen Use this screen to display DSL line statistics f
47. NG ds MAA poc A nota dot n e dap a ud 197 342 TLS SG da a 198 A a A 199 Chapter 35 Dolible Tagging D Thrine aAA AOAR 203 25 1 Double Tagging Valid saussisso oo 203 cEeseer geo 203 A DT PYG quse PRORA tee saa ean o REIN RR t A IAEA ODE ERR Rn 205 Chapter 36 r 207 3B 1 Access Control Logit ACL DUBFVEGUME sn 207 25 11 ACL Profile Aula 207 36 1 2 ACL EUN ACUSA 208 xiu ACL SUN SAS id 208 DoS AOL PU SE BB cr RRA E a On e a a Re 210 aB T AOL Profile Map Sereen vida 212 Chapter 37 Downstream A a ca 213 26 DONES BI OBS BL ra ia 213 37 2 Dovne Broadcast SCIEN sia rl 213 Chapter 38 Upsiream Bradas 215 38 1 Upstream Broadcast SOI at 215 Chapter 39 c l pL A 217 tM eel ci ale NN E ID 217 A ELO bor e 217 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 40 is AAA Aaa 219 40 1 Access Control Sereen ii db 219 10 2 BCS Catral OPE Hn M 219 E A dua sessed value A 219 205 A Supported MB iia 221 AN DITE I A 221 AAA CHO uceeiccesi used tue Eee pub er UR T bua FEE Re X ERREUR 222 40 5 Series Access Control SORRY M 223 40 5 Remote Management SOFBel uuu ir 224 Chapter 41 PEPE A A A a aid 225 41 1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Tag Formal sins is 225 41 2 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Screen oooccconncccncoccconanononanccnnanaccnnnccnnanennn nennen nnne nnn nnne 226
48. Paste See Copy Port Port This field shows each xDSL port number Active This field shows the active status of this port The port may be enabled or disabled This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 16 9 1 on page 106 Customer Info This field shows the customer information provided for this port This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 16 9 1 on page 106 Customer Tel This field shows the customer telephone number provided for this port This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 16 9 1 on page 106 Profile This field shows which profile is assigned to this port This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 16 9 1 on page 106 Mode This field shows which DSL operational mode the port is set to use This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 16 9 1 on page 106 Channels This field displays the number of PVCs Permanent Virtual Circuits that are configured for this port This is configured in the VC Setup screen see Section 16 11 on page 113 16 9 1 xDSL Port Setting Screen To open this screen click Basic Setting gt xDSL Port Setup and then click a port s index number VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 16 xDSL Port Setup General Setup Active Customer Info Figure 49 xDSL Port Setting gt ort Settin Customer Tel Profile Dervan max y Mode auto y
49. Port No Unlike the private format for PPPoE intermediate agent the TR 101 format for PPPoE intermediate agent does not include the Remote ID Sub option 41 2 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Screen Use this screen to configure the IP DSLAM to give a PPPoE termination server additional information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client To open this screen click Advanced Application PPPoE Intermediate Agent Figure 123 PPPoE Intermediate Agent PPPoE Intermediate Agent m Enable Agent O VLAN ID 0 4094 Option Mode Private Info Circuit ID Add Cancel Index VLAN ID Enable Option Mode Info Circuit ID 1 0 private Enable Disable Delete Note The agent with VLAN ID 0 is the default agent Select Al None Select r VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 41 PPPoE Intermediate Agent The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 90 PPPoE Intermediate Agent LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Agent Select this if you want the IP DSLAM to add a vendor specific tag to PADI PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation and PADR PPPoE Active Discovery Request packets from PPPoE clients in the specified VLAN This tag contains information that a PPPoE termination server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client This information includes the slot ID port number VLAN ID and MAC address of the PPPoE client as well a
50. SPN see Service Provider s Network stacking 35 static link aggregation example 238 static multicast filter 37 151 static query VID table 146 static query VLAN 146 static route setup 249 static trunking example 238 static VLAN fixed 137 forbidden 137 Txtagging 137 storage environment 284 STP Spanning Tree Protocol 38 sub carrier 266 subscriber data ports 47 super channel 112 114 surge protection circuitry 53 syntax conventions 4 SYS LED troubleshooting 275 Syslog server 217 system information viewing 81 system log 264 system monitoring 36 system reboot 261 system up time 73 T Tag Control Information 133 tag protocol identifier 93 133 tagged VLAN 133 TCI see Tag Control Information Telco 50 47 Telco 50 Cables 54 Telco 50 connector pin assignments 287 telephone company 47 telephone wire specification 283 Telnet access control 223 temperature 82 284 threshold 82 Terminal Emulation 51 Terminal emulation 282 terminal emulation 282 threshold PRM 83 temperature 82 voltage 82 Time RFC 868 86 time server protocol supported 86 time zone 86 TLS 39 197 settings 198 TLS PVC 199 ToneDiag parameter attainable net data rate 267 far end actual aggregate transmit power 267 line attenuation 267 quiet line noise 268 signal attenuation 267 signal to noise ratio 268 signal to noise ratio margin 267 ToneDiag parameters 267 tones 126 TPID see Tag Protocol Identifier TR 101 format 173
51. Setup a VLAN T MVLAN Status MYLAN Setup MYLAN Group VID Active Name Delete 100 Yes LAN1 00 EXAMPLE r1 Delete Cancel Active 1 Name VLAN ID 14094 Port Control Tagging Select All Select All Select an None ENET1 Fixed C Forbidden Tx Tagging ENET2 Fixed C Forbidden Tx Tagging 1 Fixed C Forbidden FT Tx Tagging 2 Fixed C Forbidden FT Tx Tagging 3 Fixed C Forbidden FT Tx Tagging C Forbidden Add Cancel VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 23 Multicast VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 MVLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VID This field shows the VLAN ID of each multicast VLAN Click it to edit its basic settings and port members in the fields below Active This field shows whether this multicast VLAN is active Yes or inactive No Name This field shows the name of this multicast VLAN Delete Select the check boxes of the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button You cannot delete a VLAN if any PVIDs are set to use the VLAN or the VLAN is the CPU management VLAN Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh Active Select this if you want the multicast VLAN to be active Clear this if you want the multicast VLAN to be inactive Name Enter a descriptive name for the multicast VLAN The name can be 1 31 printable ASCII cha
52. The IP DSLAM has two 1000 100Mbps auto sensing Ethernet ports There are two factors related to Ethernet speed and duplex mode In 1000 100Mbps Fast Ethernet the speed can be 100Mbps or 1000Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex or full duplex The auto negotiation capability makes one Ethernet port able to negotiate with a peer automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support When auto negotiation is turned on an Ethernet port on the IP DSLAM negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer Ethernet port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the IP DSLAM determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the IP DSLAM s auto negotiation is turned off an Ethernet port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer Ethernet port are the same in order to connect Use the Ethernet ports for subtending You can daisy chain more IP DSLAM or other Ethernet switches VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 3 Front Panel Connections Use with the following copper Ethernet cables 1000Base T 4 pair UTP Cat 5e or Cat 6 up to 100m For better performance and lower radiation noise use shielded Ethernet cables Each 1000 100M port is paired with a mini GBIC slot The IP DSLAM uses up t
53. VPI Type the Virtual Path Identifier for a channel on this port VCI Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for a channel on this port ACL Profile Use the drop down list box to select the ACL profile you want to assign to this PVC Apply Click this to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Show Port Select which xDSL port s for which to display ACL profile settings Index This field displays the number of the ADSL PVC or VDSL port Click an ADSL PVC or VDSL port s index number to use the top of the screen to edit the ADSL PVC or VDSL port Note At the time of writing you cannot edit the VPI and VCI If you want to change them add a new ADSL PVC or VDSL port with the desired settings Then you can delete any unwanted ADSL PVCs or VDSL ports Port This field displays the number of the xDSL port on which the ADSL PVC or VDSL port is configured VPI VCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port displays for a VDSL port Type This field displays PVC for an ADSL port or for a VDSL port ACL Profile This field shows the ACL profile assigned to this
54. address already learned in the MAC table fthe device has already learned the port for this MAC address then it forwards the frame to that port VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 51 MAC Table fthe device has not already learned the port for this MAC address then the frame is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion fthe device has already learned the port for this MAC address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the frame 51 2 MAC Table Screen To open this screen click Management gt MAC Table Figure 152 MAC Ta ble Show port ALL Refre l Enet 1 1 LE MAC Table Index Port VID MAC sh time 12 47 30 2008 08 22 00 00 04 a0 00 31 Refresh Flush The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 116 MAC Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Show port Select a port for which to display learned MAC addresses or display all of them Page X of X This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information Previous Next Click one of these buttons to show the previous next screen if all of the information cannot be seen in one screen Index This is the number of the MAC table entry Port This is the port to which the MAC address is associated VID This is the VLAN identifier of the MAC table entry MAC This is the MAC addres
55. describes the ports on the front panel and how to make connections to the ports 3 1 Front Panel The following figure shows the front panel of the IP DSLAM Figure 9 IP DSLAM Front Panel ZyXEL ves 1624FT 55A ALARM 3 1 1 Front Panel Ports The following table describes the ports on the front panel of the IP DSLAM Table 1 IP DSLAM Front Panel Ports CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION CO 1 24 Connect a Telco 50 connector to the telephone company for subscribers 1 to 24 USER 1 24 Connect a Telco 50 connector to DSL subscriber 1 to 24 CONSOLE Connect this mini RJ 11 port to a computer for local management ALARM This DB9 connector has alarm input pins and alarm output pins Connect the alarm input pins to alarm output terminals on other pieces of equipment Connect the alarm output pins to an alarm input terminal on another piece of equipment MGMT The RJ 45 port is for local management 1000 100 1 2 Use these RJ 45 ports for subtending You can daisy chain more IP DSLAMs or other Ethernet switches This is an electrical Ethernet interface for use with the following copper Ethernet cables e 100Base Tx 2 pair UTP Cat 5 up to 100m e 1000Base T 4 pair UTP Cat 5e or Cat 6 up to 100m For better performance and lower radiation noise use shielded Ethernet cables SFP1 2 Each of these Small Form factor Pluggable SFP slots can house a mini GBIC
56. eAd M ego Fee Reda pecu URP eduslg 111 Figure ETE SA ie c 113 Figure 53 Basic Setting gt xDSL Port Setup gt VC Setup gt Delete ooooooconccconicccinnccccccocnnnanncnnnancnnnnnncnnos 115 FUE 54 Salt PERS aaa 115 A A RagaN AAAA 116 a sl AAA tac i dude e Dobnld ds Eun eas b OON des EumR d M E DON aM EU CDU Od Gas dd RE ANNANS RERA 117 Figure 57 IPOOS 1 Mu E 120 giro AAA TUNE de EE 122 gui c SL Line Rate DR TS o SEU 125 Foute cap RM Line DAI RO ERE 127 Figure BT DL Pa ales si deaur cibos blanco o Cuna RR GR Ra Del 128 PRIS Tae DOLARES RT A 190 Poue eS VECANTE acm E poe pupae abaya tee 135 Figure 54 Stale VLAN SSA e 136 Fight 65 VLAN Part Getu comia 137 Figure 06 Seleti PRES iian RR o ae Fac Ueber Hd 138 gis russo ll Mee TP 139 Figure B8 IGMP Proxy Network EXaImple sai 142 PUSE KAME le X T TO DS UO nny Teer 143 Pius 70 IGMP BD sra am E UR ua aep Dr da te admo 144 Foue 71 Bane Part Se sanar 145 FOUS 72 OAP EONO E 146 Figure z3 IGMP Filter Prole on 147 Foure FIP Por GIOUR AAA EON Maui 148 Finde 75 MP PSI nl oan or etes etie pum tment ee cR edet o aes 149 Figure TOTEM COUE m 150 POUES 7 tata AMIGAS ie cr 151 Poe Ze RYLAAN Ss sad NN 153 Figure TIMAN Batch EET 154 Peur S0 MYLAN GOUD T 156 FUESE git ddl nnar Goedennepeace santhaeadesaabepciasmsureannsmmaeleasaures aces 157 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide List of Figures Page eA ANSE TT A A ole iegte 159 Figure 93 STP Rost Pome and Designate
57. each block and attempts to correct errors and recover the original data VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 16 xDSL Port Setup 16 3 1 Fast Mode Fast mode means no interleaving takes place and transmission is faster a fast channel This would be suitable if you have a good line where little error correction is necessary 16 4 VDSL Parameters The following sections describe the VDSL parameters you configure in the following screens xDSL Port Setup see Section 16 9 on page 105 xDSL Port Profile see Section 17 1 on page 117 16 4 1 PSD PSD Power Spectral Density defines the distribution of a VDSL line s power in the frequency domain A PSD mask specifies the maximum allowable PSD for a line 16 4 2 Limit PSD Mask To reduce the impact of interference and attenuation ITU T 993 2 specifies a limit PSD mask that limits the VDSL2 transmitters PSD at both downstream and upstream 16 4 3 RFI Radio Frequency Interference RFI is induced noise on the lines by surrounding radio frequency electromagnetic radiation from sources such as AM and HAM radio stations Since VDSL uses a much larger frequency range that overlaps with other radio frequency systems signals from VDSL lines and other radio systems interfere with each other To avoid performance degradation due to RFI set the switch to not transmit VDSL signals in the RFI band defined by the regulatory bodies ETSI and ANSI You can also configure your own
58. environment in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold Each fan has a sensor that can detect and report the fan s RPM Revolutions Per Minute Current This is the current RPM reading MAX This field displays the maximum RPM measured at this point MIN This field displays the minimum RPM measured at this point Average This field displays the average RPM measured at this sensor Threshold Low This field displays the lowest RPM limit at this sensor Threshold Hi This field displays the highest RPM limit at this sensor Status Normal indicates that the RPM is within an acceptable operating range at this point otherwise Abnormal is displayed External Alarm Status Name Apply The IP DSLAM is able to detect alarm input from other equipment connected to the ALARM connector The Status column displays Normal when no alarm input has been detected from other equipment It displays Abnormal when alarm input has been detected from other equipment Use the Name column to configure a title for each external alarm for identification purposes Use up to 31 characters Click Apply to save the name changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Fan Trap Mode The IP DSLAM has three fans S
59. grelicmpl lt ptype gt VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 207 Chapter 36 ACL ptype 0 255 mask 0 32 If you apply multiple profiles to an ADSL PVC or VDSL port the IP DSLAM checks the profiles by rule number The lower the rule number the higher the priority the rule and profile has For example there are two ACL profiles assigned to a PVC Profilel is for VLAN ID 100 rule number 9 traffic and Profile2 is for IEEE 802 1p priority 0 traffic rule number 12 The IP DSLAM checks Profilel first If the traffic is VLAN ID 100 the IP DSLAM follows the action in Profilel and does not check Profile2 You cannot assign profiles that have the same rule numbers to the same ADSL PVC or VDSL port 36 1 2 ACL Profile Actions The IP DSLAM can perform the following actions after it classifies upstream traffic rate rate change the rate to the specified value 64 65472 kbps rvlan rvlan change the VLAN ID to the specified value 1 4094 rpri rpri change the IEEE 802 1p priority to the specified value 0 7 deny do not forward the packet The IP DSLAM can apply more than one action to a packet unless you select deny If you select the rvlan action the IP DSLAM replaces the VLAN ID before it compares the VLAN ID of the packet to the VID of the ADSL PVC or VDSL port As a result it is suggested that you replace VLAN ID on super channels not normal PVC since super channels accept any tagged traffic If
60. in conjunction with IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy to allow multicast MAC address es that are not learned by IGMP snooping or IGMP proxy VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the IP DSLAM Multicast VLAN Multicast VLAN is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD using multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring based service provider network Multicast VLAN allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management VLAN Isolation Use isolation to block the VDSL2 subscribers in a specific VLAN from sending traffic directly to each other MAC Media Access Control Filter Use the MAC filter to accept or deny incoming frames based on MAC Media Access Control address es that you specify You may enable disable the MAC filter on specific ports You may specify up to ten MAC addresses per port Security Password protection for system management VLAN RADIUS client STP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Rapid STP R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between IP DSLAMs bridges or routers It allows a IP DSLAM to interact with other R STP compliant IP DSLAMS in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network IEEE 802 1x Port based Authentication The IP D
61. is a field used for packet classification on DiffServ networks The higher the value the higher the priority Lower priority packets may be dropped if the total traffic exceeds the capacity of the network 33 2 DSCP Setup Screen Use this screen to activate or deactivate DSCP on each port To open this screen click Advanced Application DSCP Figure 105 DSCP Setup a OWES T DSCP Setup DSCP Map Port Active Select 1 1 2 O 3 1 Active Inactive Select AM None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 DSCP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays each port number Active This field displays whether DSCP is active V or inactive on this port Select is this and click Active or Inactive to enable or disable the DSCP on this port Active Click this to enable DSCP on the selected ports Inactive Click this to disable DSCP on the selected ports VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 33 DSCP Table 67 DSCP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION All Click this to select all entries in the table None Click this to un select all entries in the table 33 3 DSCP Map Screen Use this screen to convert DSCP priority to IEEE 802 1p priority To open this screen click Advanced Application gt DSCP gt DSCP Map Figure 106 DSCP Map DSCP Setup Source DSCP 1 2 3 LEMA oO AA YOO mo TV
62. is not inhibited Keep the bottom top and all sides clear of obstructions and away from the exhaust of other equipment Make sure you can feel and or hear the fans working working fans emit a low buzz and blow air If the voltage levels are outside the allowed range take a screen shot of the statistics monitor command display and contact your vendor VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 275 Chapter 53 Troubleshooting 53 3 SFP LNK LEDs Do Not Turn On The LEDs for one of the SFP slots do not turn on Table 120 SFP LNK LED Troubleshooting STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Make sure that the Ethernet port s mode is set to match that of the peer Ethernet device Check the cable and connections between the SFP slot and the peer Ethernet device Check the mini GBIC transceiver B Ww Mm Make sure that the peer Ethernet device is functioning properly If the cable transceiver and peer Ethernet device are all OK and the LEDs stay off there may be a problem with the SFP slot Contact the distributor 53 4 100 1000 LEDs Do Not Turn On A 100 1000 Ethernet port s LEDs do not turn on Table 121 100 1000 LED Troubleshooting STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Each 100 1000M RJ 45 Ethernet port is paired with a mini GBIC slot The IP DSLAM uses one connection per pair Check the Speed Mode settings in the ENET Port Setup screen Make sure that the 100 1000 Ethernet port
63. is the time interval in seconds at which the IP DSLAM transmits a configuration message The root bridge determines Hello time Max age and Forwarding delay Forward delay second This is the time in seconds the IP DSLAM will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Port Status This identifies the IP DSLAM s ports that support the use of STP If STP is activated the following fields appear If STP is not activated Disabled appears State This field displays the port s RSTP or STP state With RSTP the state can be discarding learning or forwarding With STP the state can be disabled blocking listening learning or forwarding Disabled appears when RSTP has not been turned on for the individual port or the whole device Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the switch through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree 0x0000 displays when this device is the root switch Path cost This is the path cost from this port to the root switch Cost to root This is the path cost from the root port on this switch to the root switch Designated bridge This is the unique identifier for the bridge that has the lowest path cost to reach the root bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address Designated port This is the port on the designated bridge that has the lowest path cost to reach the root bridge consist
64. need to configure the DSLAM the IP DSLAM to translate PPPoA frames to PPPoE packets and vise versa When PPPoA packets are received from the CPE the ATM headers are removed and the IP DSLAM adds PPPoE and Ethernet headers before sending the packets to the BRAS When the IP DSLAM receives PPPoE packets from the BRAS PPPoE and Ethernet headers are stripped and necessary PVC information such as encapsulation type is added before forwarding to the designated CPE Client 32 2 PPPoA to PPPoE Screen Use this screen to set up PPPoA to PPPoE conversions on each port This conversion is set up by creating a PAE PVC See Chapter 16 on page 99 for background information about creating PVCs To open this screen click Advanced Application gt PPPoA to PPPoE VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 32 PPPoA to PPPoE Figure 103 PPPoA to PPPoE a DDDaA D Port al y VPI fo vel 0 IPGos Profile DEFVAL y Encap llc y PVID 1 1 4094 Priority oy AC Name Service Name Hellotime 600 sec 0 600 Show Port All Inde Port VPUVCI PVID Priori IPQos Profile Select AMI None Encap Hellotime _Datete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 PPPoA to PPPoE LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to set up PPPoA to PPPoE conversions This field is read only once you click on a port number below
65. parameter is defined as the number of consecutive DMT symbols or fractions thereof The number of symbols decides how long in one period errors can be completely corrected A higher symbol value provides higher error correction capability but it causes overhead and higher delay which may impact multimedia data receiving quality Enter 0 to disable impulse noise protection UPBO UPBO Upstream Power Back Off mitigates far end crosstalk FEXT caused by upstream transmission on shorter loops to longer loops See Section 13 1 7 on page 169 Select Enable or Disable to turn it on or off ESEL This is Upstream Power Back off Exchange Side Electrical Length This specifies the electrical length of the cable between CPE and CO Set this other than 0 1 1270 in 0 1 dB to force CPE devices to use the Device s electrical length value for UPBO adjustment Set this to O to use a dynamic electrical length based on the result of the negotiation between the Device and CPE devices Upstream Band 1 2 3 Specify 4000 8095 0 01 dBm Hz for parameter A which defines the original band shape Specify 0 4095 0 01 dBm Hz for parameter B which defines the power back off degree Parameter A and B are used for UPBO PSD mask calculation DPBO Select Enable to avoid interference with other services such as ISDN ADSL or ADSL2 provided by other devices on the same bundle of lines ISDN in Europe uses a frequency range of up
66. port number upon which the station listens for SNMP traps Trusted Host A trusted host is a computer that is allowed to use SNMP with the IP DSLAM 0 0 0 0 allows any computer to use SNMP to access the IP DSLAM Specify an IP address to allow only the computer with that IP address to use SNMP to access the IP DSLAM Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 40 5 Service Access Control Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Access Control Service Access Control Figure 121 Service Access Control Service Access Control g Up Services Active Server Port Telnet 2 233 165535 FTP e 31 85535 WEB Vv eo 1 65535 ICMP Iv The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 Service Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Up Click Up to go back to the previous screen Services Services you may use to access the IP DSLAM are listed here Active Select the Active check boxes for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the IP DSLAM Server Port For Telnet FTP or web services you may change the default service port by typing
67. range of VLANS to handle multiple applications A service provider s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags to traffic The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer Therefore there is no VLAN tag overlap among customers so traffic from different customers is kept separate Before the IP DSLAM sends the frames from the customers the VLAN ID is added to the frames When packets intended for specific customers are received on the IP DSLAM the outer VLAN tag is removed before the traffic is sent 34 1 1 TLS Network Example In the following example figure both A and B are Service Provider s Network SPN customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices and branch offices respectively Both have an identical VLAN tag for their VLAN group The service provider can separate these two VLANs within its network by adding tag 37 to distinguish customer A and tag 48 to distinguish customer B at edge device 1 and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 34 TLS PVC Figure 107 Transparent LAN Service Network Example A VLAN 24 Nam coron 1 2 N A 37 24 B 48 24 hy m Name VLAN 24 VLAN 24 B 34 2 TLS Screen Use this screen to set up Transparent LAN Services on each port This is set up by creating a TLS PVC See Chapter 16 on page 99 for background information about creating PVCs To open this screen click Advanc
68. re establish a valid network topology In STP once a stable network topology has been established all devices listen for Hello BPDUs transmitted from the root bridge If an STP aware device does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Max Age the device assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This device then initiates negotiations with other devices to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology RSTP assigns three port states to eliminate packet looping while STP assigns five see Table 49 on page 162 A device port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops Table 49 RSTP Port States RSTP PORT STATE STP PORT STATE DESCRIPTION Discarding Disabled RSTP or STP is disabled default Discarding Blocking In RSTP BPDUs are discarded In STP only configuration and management BPDUs are received and processed Discarding Listening In RSTP BPDUs are discarded In STP all BPDUs are received and processed Learning Learning All BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded Forwarding Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed All information frames are received and forwarded See the IEEE 802 1 w standard for more information on RSTP See the IEEE 802 1D standard for more information on STP VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapt
69. remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Caution Risk of explosion if battery on the motherboard is replaced by an incorrect type Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions Dispose them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment For detailed information about recycling of this product please contact your local city office your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device Ensure that the fan filter is in place before switching on the IP DSLAM Use only No 26 AWG American Wire Gauge or larger telecommunication line cord Fuse Warning Replace a fuse only with a fuse of the same type and rating The length of exposed bare power wire should not exceed 7mm Fan Module Warning Use the fan module handle when pulling out or pushing in the fan module Be careful not to put fingers or objects inside the fan module VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Safety Warnings The intra building port s of the equipment or subassembly is suitable for connection to intrabuilding or unexposed wiring or cabling only The intra bu
70. remove the alarm from the system VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 48 Alarm 48 5 1 Edit Alarm Event Setup Screen Use this screen to specify the severity level of an alarm s and where the system is to send the alarm s To open this screen click Alarm Alarm Status Then click an alarm s index number Figure 142 Alarm Event Setup Edit Alarm Condition Code dsl 5000 Condition Facility SNMP Syslog Severity Clearable line up Local 1 IV Iv Info IV The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 109 Alarm Event Setup Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Alarm This field displays the alarm category to which the alarm belongs eqpt represents equipment alarms dsl represents Digital Subscriber Line DSL alarms enet represents Ethernet alarms sys represents system alarms Condition Code This field displays the condition code number for the specific alarm message Condition This field displays a text description for the condition under which the alarm applies Facility The log facility Local 1 Local 7 has the device log the syslog messages to a particular file in the syslog server Select a log facility Local 1 Local 7 from the drop down list box if this entry is for sending alarms to a syslog server See your syslog program s documentation for details SNMP Select this check box to have the system send this alarm to an SNMP s
71. select ports and click apply button 0 1 2 3 4 35 16 T 8 9 zs ppmnmpmnnnnn sasppmmmpmmpmmnnmpmnnn 2200050050050 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide xDSL Profiles Setup A profile is a list of settings that you define Then you can assign them to one or more individual ports For background information about many of these settings see Chapter 16 on page 99 17 1 xDSL Port Profile Screen To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Profiles Setup Figure 56 Port Profile ED Port Profile cmm xDSL Profile IPQos Profile Alarm Profile Index Name Latency Mode Down Up Stream Rate kbps Select 1 DEFVAL Interleave 100000 60000 e 2 DEFVAL MAX Interleave 100000 60000 C Modify Delete Name e Latency Mode Interleave v Up Stream Down Stream Max Rate 126000 64 128000 kbps 128000 p4 128000 kbps Min Rate ca 32 128000 kbps sa 32 128000 kbps Interleave Delay 20 1 255 ms zo 1 255 ms Max SNR 51 0 31 aB 51 0 31 aB Min SNR fo 0 31 dB fo 0 31 aB Target SNR 6 0 31 08 s 0 31 08 Up Shift SNR 9 0 31 dB fo 0 31 08 Down Shift SNR s 0 31 dB 3 0 31 08 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 xDSL Port Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the port profile index number Name These are the names of individual profiles The DEFVAL profile always exists and all of the DSL ports have it assigned to them by default You can use u
72. that is recognized in the local network NetBios Pass through NetBIOS Network Basic Input Output System are TCP or UDP packets that enable a computer to find other computers DHCP Pass through Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol automatically assigns IP addresses to clients when they log on DHCP centralizes IP address management on central computers that run the DHCP server program DHCP leases addresses for a period of time which means that past addresses are recycled and made available for future reassignment to other systems EAPOL Pass through EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 over LAN EAP is used with IEEE 802 1x to allow additional authentication methods besides RADIUS to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients IGMP Pass through Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts Add Click Add to save the filter settings The settings then display in the summary table at the bottom of the screen Clicking Add saves your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh This table shows the xDSL port packet filter settings Port These are the nu
73. the alarm severity threshold for recording alarms on an individual port s Management Maintenance Use this screen to perform firmware and configuration file maintenance as well as restart the system Diagnostic Use this screen to view system logs and test port s MAC Table Use this screen to view the MAC addresses of devices attached to what ports ARP Table Use this screen to view the MAC address to IP address resolution table VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 7 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 4 Web Configurator Screens continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Config Save Config Save Use this screen to save the device s configuration into the nonvolatile memory the IP DSLAM s storage that remains even if the IP DSLAM s power is turned off 7 5 Changing Your Password After you log in for the first time it is recommended you change the default administrator password Click Basic Setting and then User Account to display the User Account screen Figure 23 User Account A AA Authentication Privilege User Account Enable Vv Name Password Retype Password to confirm nion y Name Select r Privilege high Enable Y Index 1 admin Click the index number 1 to edit the default administrator account settings Figure 24 User Account A OR SET User Account Authentication Enable Vv Name admin Password eee Retyp
74. the configured rate Table 126 Troubleshooting the SYNC rate STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Connect the VDSL modem or router directly to the VDSL port using a different telephone wire 2 If the rates match the quality of the telephone wiring that connects the subscriber to the VDSL port may be limiting the speed to a certain rate If they do not match when a good wire is used contact the distributor 53 10 Configured Settings The configured settings do not take effect Table 127 Troubleshooting the IP DSLAM s Configured Settings CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the config save command after you finish configuring to save the IP DSLAM s settings 53 11 Password If you forget your password you will need to use the console port to reload the factory default configuration file see Section 53 15 on page 280 278 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 53 Troubleshooting 53 12 System Lockout Any of the following could also lock you and others out from using in band management managing through the data ports 1 Deleting the management VLAN default is VLAN 1 2 Incorrectly configuring the CPU VLAN 3 Incorrectly configuring the access control settings 4 Disabling all ports BS Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the system If you lock yourself and others out of the system you can try using the console port to reconfigure the system See Section 53 15 on page 280 5
75. the line when no DSL signals are present It is measured in dBm Hz The QLN can be used in analyzing crosstalk SNR dB This is the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio in dB A DMT sub carrier s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power The SNR can be used in analyzing time dependent changes in crosstalk levels and line attenuation such as those caused by temperature variations and moisture VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide MAC Table This chapter introduces the MAC Table 51 1 Introduction to MAC Table The MAC table lists device MAC addresses that are dynamically learned by the IP DSLAM The table shows the following for each MAC address the port upon which Ethernet frames were received from the device to which VLAN groups the device belongs if any and to which channel it is connected for devices connected to DSL ports The device uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames See the following figure Figure 151 MAC Table Filtering Flowchart Is destination MAC address in the MAC table No Yes Is outgoing port different from incoming port Forward to all ports except the incoming one Filter this frame Forward to outgoing pert 1 The device examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came 2 The device checks to see if the frame s destination MAC address matches a source MAC
76. the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again 17 2 IPQoS Overview Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand A layer 2 classifier groups traffic according to the Ethernet type VLAN group MAC address and or port number A layer 3 classifier groups traffic according to the IP address and or TCP UDP protocol number Configure IPQoS on the IP DSLAM to group and prioritize application traffic in queues for downstream direction toward CPE devices and fine tune network performance Setting up IPQoS involves four parameters VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 17 xDSL Profiles Setup 17 2 1 PIR Peak Information Rate This is the maximum data rate allowed for the downstream traffic flowing through the IP DSLAM CIR Committed Information Rate This is the guaranteed data rate for the downstream traffic flowing through the IP DSLAM PBS Peak Burst Size This is the maximum burst size allowed for the downstream traffic flowing through the IP DSLAM when the burst data rate is between the predefined PIR an
77. the telephone line The SELT takes at least fifteen seconds To check the status of the SELT or to look at the results when the SELT is complete select a port number from the Port drop down list box and click Get SELT Data The results tell you what gauge of telephone wire is connected to the port and the approximate length of the line VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 50 Diagnostics 50 2 Log Format The common format of the system logs is lt item no time process type log message Table 112 Log Format LABEL DESCRIPTION item no This is the index number of the log entry time This is the time and date when the log was created process This is the process that created the log type This identifies what kind of log it is INFO identifies an information log WARN identifies a warning log log message This is the log s detailed information see Table 113 on page 265 50 2 1 Log Messages The following table lists and describes the system log messages Table 113 Log Messages LOG MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION xDSL port Link INFO ADSL port established a connection Up SN seq no ds port port number rate us rate seq no sequence number of the connection or xDSL Link Info NM lt ds NM gt lt us NM gt lt ds rate gt downstream rate lt us rate gt upstream rate us NM gt upstream noise margin ds N
78. then appears in the Current Date field after you click Apply Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC Universal Time Coordinated formerly known as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and your time zone from the drop down list box This field is only available when you selected Time RFC 868 or NTP RFC 1305 in the Use Time Server When Bootup field Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide User Account The User Account screens allows you to set up and configure system administrator accounts for the IP DSLAM You can also configure the authentication policy for IP DSLAM administrators This is different than port authentication in Chapter 27 on page 167 See Chapter 27 on page 167 for background information on authentication 12 1 User Account Screen To open this screen click Basic Setting User Account Figure 38 User Account A UserAccount User Account Authentication Enable Vv Name Password Retype Password to confirm Privilege high y index Enable Name Privilege Select 1 V admin high LH The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Us
79. to 80 kHz while ISDN in Japan uses a frequency range of up to 640 kHz ADSL utilizes the 1 1 MHz band Both ADSL2 and ADSL2 utilize the 2 2 MHz band Select Disable to turn it off EPSD This is a pre defined PSD mask to reduce interference with other services for example ADSL in the same copper bundle psd co Select this if the Device is deployed at the CO and you want it to use the full ADSL band psd flat Select this to have the Device not use the ADSL band psd cab ansi Select this if the Device is deployed in a cabinet and has to coexist with other services in region A psd cab etsi Select this if the Device is deployed in a cabinet and has to coexist with other services in region B psd exch etsi Select this if the Device is deployed in an exchange and has to co exist with other services in region B psd exch ansi Select this if the Device is deployed in an exchange and has to co exist with other services in region A Please refer to G 993 2 appendix for region A and B Click Custom to display a screen where you can customize breakpoints and PSD level for the PSD mask See Section 16 9 2 on page 111 DPBOESEL This is the electrical length of the cable between CO and Cabinet See Section 13 1 9 on page 170 ESCMA These parameters define a cable model that is used to describe the frequency ESCMB dependent loss of exchange side cables ESCMC MUS This defines the assumed minimum usable received PSD mask in dBm Hz for exchang
80. to configure the system and management IP addresses and subnet masks ENET Port Setup Use this screen to configure settings for the Ethernet ports xDSL Port Setup Use these screens for configuring settings for individual DSL ports xDSL Profiles Setup Use these screens for configuring profiles for the DSL ports xDSL Line Data Use these screens for viewing DSL line operating values bit allocation and performance counters Advanced Application VLAN Use these screens for viewing and configuring the VLAN settings Protocol VLAN Use this screen to configure protocol based VLAN IGMP Use these screens to view IGMP status information and configure IGMP settings and IGMP filters Static Multicast Use this screen to configure static multicast entries Multicast VLAN Use these screens to set up multicast VLANs that can be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network Filtering Use this screen to configure packet filtering MAC Filter Use this screen to configure MAC filtering for each port RSTP Use this submenu to go to screens for displaying Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP information and configuring RSTP settings Port Authentication Use this submenu to go to screens for configuring RADIUS and IEEE 802 1x security settings Port Security Use this screen to limit the number of MAC address that can be learned on a port DHCP Relay Use th
81. to see which PVCs are assigned to it Index This field displays the number of an entry Profile This field shows the ACL profile assigned to this PVC Port This field displays the ADSL port number on which the PVC is configured VPI VCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier E The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port displays for VDSL VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Downstream Broadcast This chapter shows you how to allow or block downstream broadcast traffic 37 1 Downstream Broadcast Downstream broadcast allows you to block downstream broadcast packets from being sent to specified VLANs on specified ports 37 2 Downstream Broadcast Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Downstream Broadcast Figure 115 Downstream Broadcast Downstream Broadcast Port 1 VLAN O Add Blocking Table Port far y Index Port VLAN Select Delete Select All None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 76 Downstream Broadcast LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to configure settings VLAN Specify the number of a VLAN on this entry s port to which you do not want to send broadcast traffic The VLAN must already be configured in the system Add Click Add to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these ch
82. xDSL port Otherwise it displays VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to frames received on this channel Priority This is the priority value 0 to 7 added to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to Delete remove the entry Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table 34 3 TLS PVC Screen Use this screen to set up Transparent LAN Services on each port This is set up by creating a TLS PVC See Chapter 16 on page 99 for background information about creating PVCs To open this screen click Advanced Application TLS TLS PVC You can NOT configure PPPoA to PPPoE and TLS PVC settings on the same PVC VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 34 TLS PVC Figure 109 TLS PVC c MEL TLS TLS PVC Port i VPI o VCI 0 IPQos Profile DEFVAL y Encap llc VID fi 1 4094 Priority 0 y Apply Cancel Show Port A11 Index Port VPIAVCI VID Priority IPQos Profile Encap Select Delete Select All None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 TLS PVC LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to set up a TLS PVC This field is read only once you click on a port number below VPI Type the Virtual Path Identifier
83. 00000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 xDSL Line Rate Info LABEL DESCRIPTION information Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to view Refresh Click Refresh to display updated information Port Name This section displays the name of the configured DSL port DSL port is not connected to a subscriber Rate The rate fields display the transmission rates Link Down indicates that the Rate data Down up Stream These are the rates in Kbps at which the port has been sending and receiving VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 18 xDSL Line Data Table 26 xDSL Line Rate Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Down up Stream Noise Margin These are the DSL line s downstream and upstream noise margins Measured in decibels dB Down up Stream Attenuation These are the reductions in amplitude of the downstream and upstream DSL signals Measured in decibels dB Down up Stream Attainable Rate These are the highest theoretically possible transfer rates in Kbps at which the port could send and receive data Info Service Mode This field displays the VDSL or ADSL standard that the port is currently using Trellis Encoding This field displays whether Trellis encoding is turned on or off Trellis encoding helps to
84. 1 3 equ Pin info 08 19 13 49 41 eqpt y set oom major 08 19 13 50 08 enet 1 up 5 enet info 08 18 13 50 35 enet 1 ar wet cone major 08 19 13 50 35 enet1 Page 1of 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 107 Alarm History LABEL DESCRIPTION Alarm Type Select which type of alarms to display by Severity or select All to look at all the alarms Refresh Click this button to update this screen Clear Click this button to erase the clearable alarm entries No This field displays the index number of the historial alarm entry in the system Alarm This field displays the alarm category to which the alarm belongs Condition This field displays a text description for the condition under which the historial alarm applies See Section 48 3 on page 252 for alarm condition description Severity This field displays the alarm severity level critical major minor or info Timestamp This field displays the month day hour minute and second that the system created the log Source This field displays where the alarm originated This is either a DSL port number one of the Ethernet ports enet 1 or 2 or eqpt for the system itself Page X of X This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information Previous Page Click this to display the preceding page of entries Next Page Click this to display the following page o
85. 1 72860275 Tx packets 66851 0 Tx broadcast 5 0 Tx fragments 0 0 Tx error underrun 0 0 Txjabber 0 94115 packet 65 127 20541 16807 packet 256 511 14884 2402 packet 1024 1518 46322 D 195075 broadcast total 72130 8687 octet total 87989492 aL ad Set Interval Stop i y Clear Counter Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 Port Statistics Ethernet LABEL DESCRIPTION Up Click this to go back to the Home screen Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to view statistics This field identifies the port described in this screen Port Name This field displays the name that you have configured for the port Rx bytes This field shows the number of octets of Ethernet frames received that are from 0 to 1518 octets in size counting the ones in bad packets not counting framing bits but counting FCS Frame Check Sequence octets An octet is an 8 bit binary digit byte Rx packets This field shows the number of packets received on this port including multicast unicast broadcast and bad packets Rx error fcs This field shows the number of frames received with an integral length of 64 to 1518 octets and containing a Frame Check Sequence error Rx multicast This field shows the number of good multicast frames received of 64 to 1518 octets in length for non VLAN or 1522 octets for VLAN not including Broadcast frames Frames
86. 10 10 10 is a valid multicast MAC address Clicking Add saves your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Multicast VLAN This chapter describes the Multicast VLAN screens 23 1 Multicast VLAN Overview Multicast VLAN allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management When the IP DSLAM forwards traffic to a subscriber port it tries to forward traffic to a normal PVC with the same VLAN ID If this PVC does not exist the IP DSLAM uses the super channel instead This applies to all downstream traffic not just multicast traffic It is suggested to use a super channel for multicast VLAN If a normal PVC is used and the multicast VLAN ID is not the same as the PVC s VID the IP DSLAM does not forward traffic to this PVC even if the subscriber s port has joined the multicast VLAN Since the IP DSLAM might change the subscriber s VLAN ID to the multicast VLAN ID both the subscriber s port and the Ethernet port should join the multicast VLAN 23 2 MVLAN Status Screen Use this screen to look at a summary of all multicast V
87. 167 222 Call el mE 168 2 2 802 DX SOE nauseum ada 169 Chapter 28 a 13 Se X 171 201 Fon SUI OLE ida 171 282 PO OSCE ai 171 Chapter 29 DAG Relay Re A ene 173 Paar ROIT A T E oaks ease 173 29 2 DHCP Relay Agent Information Option Option 82 seen 173 Kc M S MSIE I TI LU LU T 173 Bus c PIS TES cucdiatbeidivaa tend si oM ise te tuoi DE ede HE a bona ED s UNE T UE 174 29 3 DACP Relay SOBE io ads 174 Chapter 30 A 177 30 1 DHCP SU A T il TM 177 ile DHCP SOO DOEI C E its 177 20 2 DROP Snoop SIGS SEEE sisi Oe FER 178 204A DHOP SUS gt aia 179 Chapter 31 PP PA 181 11120804 Heute NOS i 181 31 1 1 2684 Routed Mode EXSImple occiso rs dir o oidos 181 31 2 2094 Routed PC SCS a ences utente a 182 31 2 2634 Fouad Doman SEICED ainia ii 184 PVs Aim POR dcc MT D EET 185 919 2084 Fouled CARTE y mer Me 186 Chapter 32 A Me c 189 245 PPPSS TO PPPOE CUBO rs dE FoU PYR REN 189 sos FFFA O PPEPOE SOS iia 189 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Table of Contents pee PPPOA tO PPPOE Sias DERE soria 191 Chapter 33 DSG P M M 195 al DS OVN ON AAA AAA 195 33 DSOP SUN ONT ainia 195 aos DEEP MAN a aa 196 Chapter 34 TES 197 341 Transparent LAN Service TLS OVOIVIBW ina 197 24 14 TELS
88. 2 Kbps and if you specify 66 Kbps the actual rate will not be over 64Kbps Regardless of a profile s configured upstream and downstream rates the IP DSLAM automatically limits the actual rates for each individual port to the maximum speeds supported by the port s DSL operational mode For example if you configure a profile with a maximum downstream rate of 25000 Kbps and apply it to a port set to use Gdmt the IP DSLAM automatically uses a maximum downstream rate of 8160 Kbps This means that if you configure a profile with very high rates you can still use it with any port See Table 18 on page 104 for a list of the maximum rates supported by the different xDSL standards 16 8 Default Settings The default profile always exists and all of the DSL ports use the default profile settings when the IP DSLAM is shipped The default profile s name is set to DEFVAL MAX See Chapter 54 on page 283 for the settings of the default profile and DSL port default settings VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 16 xDSL Port Setup 16 9 xDSL Port Setup Screen To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Port Setup Figure 47 xDSL Port Setup X P D xDSL Port Setup VC Setup customer into 7 customer Tet O Advanced Features IGMP filter security Packet Filter settings Paste alarm Profile O PviDaPriority o Customer Info Customer Tel Profile Mode Channels A enabled DEFVAL MAX auto 1 2 enabled DEFVAL MA
89. 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 512 1 100 000 Kbps Apply Cancel End Multicast IP Delete Bandwidth Kbps Select Select All None Table 35 The following table describes the labels in this screen IGMP Bandwidth LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Bandwidth Enter the default bandwidth for multicast channels for which you have not configured bandwidth requirements Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Index Select a unique number for this setting If you select a number that is already used the new setting overwrites the old one when you click Apply Start Multicast IP Enter the beginning of the multicast range End Multicast IP Enter the end of the multicast range For one multicast address enter the start of the multicast range again Bandwidth Enter the bandwidth requirement for the specified multicast range Apply Click Apply to save the filter settings The settings then display in the summary table at the bottom of the screen Clicking Apply saves your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the na
90. 252 A MO II SON ds as o 253 48 8 Akim Event SL SOON daa an 254 48 5 1 Edit Alarm Event Sete SCEE a Re GR RR aO GP RE EI ER be 256 28 5 Alarm POIL Setup GIG aiaiai optat Kass cuu adu aD a iaaa Gad N ce D MR Eo Y RR 256 Chapter 49 MaintenaNCE A 259 CMM rupi pecie m m 259 49 2 Frimware Upgrade SION on did Rd 259 49 3 Restore Cong ratlan GORGE sarria ie 260 29 4 Backing Up a Danigursti n PIS nc 260 48s Load Factory DOO 2uascuscanissssoddidartqo n OndaerkucxDulap tac Rd RE edad ELS d a KE caa dae 261 LIH FSD di dace nis ots ies coeds cece calc sje Saeed cance eee ed cece atte 261 Z9 7 aman Dine PTP da 262 Chapter 50 Ric le 263 SU ESO SUS nio aaa 263 30 2 LAMA is ia 265 vac Neqoe sia a bs 265 DOS LDM Test Parameters ceci 266 ou A Tone Parama uti a rf adn aa bL 267 Chapter 51 30 jl 269 Sl pires Tero O MAC Table c CES 269 DI MAG Tabla O aa bora Creo aii 270 Chapter 52 ARP rn Mee 271 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Table of Contents 52 1 nrod ion O ARP TRIB nra a 271 AE Mal PAIR AE WOON c cmm 271 22 ARF Table c ci ie e o 271 Part V Troubleshooting and Specifications 273 Chapter 53 jl 9 A AY 9
91. 3 13 SNMP The SNMP manager server cannot get information from the IP DSLAM Table 128 Troubleshooting the SNMP Server STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Ping the IP DSLAM from the SNMP server If you cannot check the cable connections and IP configuration 2 Check to see that the community or trusted host in the IP DSLAM matches the SNMP server s community 3 Make sure that your computer s IP address matches a configured trusted host IP address if configured 53 14 Telnet I cannot telnet into the IP DSLAM Table 129 Troubleshooting Telnet STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Make sure that the number maximum allowed number of telnet sessions has not already reached The IP DSLAM only accepts up to five telnet sessions at a time Make sure that a telnet session is not already operating The IP DSLAM only accepts one telnet session at a time 2 Make sure that your computer s IP address matches a configured secured client IP address if configured The IP DSLAM immediately disconnects the telnet session if secured host IP addresses are configured and your computer s IP address does not match one of them VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 279 Chapter 53 Troubleshooting Table 129 Troubleshooting Telnet continued STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 3 Make sure that you have not disabled the Telnet service or changed the server port number that the IP DSLAM uses for Telnet 5 Ping the IP DSLAM fr
92. 55 1099 6875 feo 5 376 1621 5000 100 6 511 2203 6875 103 7 512 2208 0 160 8 oo RN 9 lh o0 IF 0w n gt o bo mo o 00 fo 2 o 00 bo 3 n 00 RN 14 o o o 5 o 00 RN 6 fo o RN Any Cancel VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 16 xDSL Port Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 DPBO EPSD Custom LABEL DESCRIPTION Port X This field displays the port you are currently configuring 01 16 Click the 01 16 tab to configure PSD levels for break points 1 to 16 and click the 17 32 17 32 tab to configure PSD levels for break points 17 to 32 Break Point This index number identifies each incremental break point There are 32 break points in total you can configure Tone Index A tone is a sub channel of VDSL band DMT divides VDSL bands into many 4 3125 kHz tones Enter an increased number than previous row from 0 to 4096 in this field that is also the horizontal of the DPBOEPSD graph Frequency This read only field displays a frequency that equals the tone index multiple 4 3125 kHz This field automatically calculates after a Tone Index value is entered PSD level Enter the PSD level for the corresponding frequency break point Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen 16 10 Virtual Channels 16 10 1 Defining virtual channels also cal
93. 55 255 0 172 16 37 205 l m 2 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 l Li Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 104 Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Use this section to create a new static route Name Type a name to identify this static route Use up to 31 ASCII characters Spaces and tabs are not allowed Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing Address is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for this destination Gateway IP Address Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your device that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your device VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 47 Static Routing Table 104 Static Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a go
94. 624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 16 xDSL Port Setup Table 19 xDSL Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile amp Mode Select this check box to copy this port s port profile settings and DSL operational mode The port profile settings are configured in the xDSL Profiles Setup screens see Chapter 17 on page 117 The DSL operational mode is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 16 9 1 on page 106 IGMP filter Select this check box to copy this port s IGMP filter settings These are configured in the IGMP Filter Profile screen see Section 21 7 on page 147 Security Select this check box to copy this port s security settings This is configured in the Port Security screen see Section 28 2 on page 171 Packet Filter Select this check box to copy this port s packet filter settings These are configured in the Packet Filtering screen see Section 24 1 on page 157 Virtual Channels Select this check box to copy this port s virtual channel settings These are configured in the VC Setup screen see Section 16 11 on page 113 Alarm Profile Select this check box to copy this port s alarm profile This is configured in the Alarm Profile Setup screen see Section 17 3 on page 121 PVID amp Priority Select this check box to copy this port s PVID and priority settings These are configured in the VLAN Port Setting screen see Section 19 5 on page 137
95. 92 Chapter 14 95 Chapter 15 ENET Pon SOMI 97 Chapter 16 ij M 9 A 1 A A YA 1 A U9 A 99 I5 1 DSL PORE aras at 99 E IO PRU TE E ILS 99 1 Menday Dolar secas 99 1521 Fast o se Aa 100 164 us PIANO aria 100 IAI POD toc 100 IAEA POL AS vor a a 100 16 4 3 RFI Radio Frequency InterfereltOs aissac ciaisdactcesdaledncmeniscsesentdadadecendaledneemaiadaedensty 100 1644 Frogen Band PIS Aa 100 E SA ot Habs EG tea aaa Puta scs ad Rad Eod Dx QU Eu d 101 16 4 6 Impulse Noise Protection INE coruna 102 adco e pals aoe nen P 102 ASP T 102 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 13 Table of Contents TOL S BEBO Elena EO encina rn rio 103 e Sad AEG o AAA A Rea dar R 104 16 6 Downstream and DpSEIPOGETI ninia 104 16 7 Donllgured Versus Actual Pate eoe task rd AAA 104 1S Dammi nop TE 104 t eMusic ios 105 15 9 2 DSL Pon GELD SU BON ss alas 106 15 92 DEB EPSO SUS iii dada TH UNIES UOCE SD iaa add 112 IU NES QS LL ar UU I T T 112 ixi LLO 113 a v T rr 113 DNE ec UE di c TT 113 Chapter 17 XDSL Prolles A a 117 171 xDSL Part Prolile SOT sais ri AAA E oc at 117 AE IPO ERE ar AA ed 119 IEPS Proile DOGON e t ieactanatie thes edaaeserdaeinadeaaeeades 120 123 Alam Pro
96. ADSL PVC or VDSL port Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to Delete remove the entry VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 36 ACL Table 73 ACL Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table 36 3 ACL Profile Screen Use this screen to set up ACL profiles To open this screen click Advanced Application gt ACL ACL Profile Figure 113 ACL Profile ACL Profile Setup g ACL Setup ACL Profile ACL Port Map Profile Name cg ae C 1 ethernet type o 0 565535 van o 14094 C 2 ethemet type b 0 65535 source mac 1 E C E C 3 ethernet type b 0 65535 dest mac 1 1 7 C 4 vlan fo 1 4094 source mac C 1 1 1 7 C 5 vlan o 14094 dest mac a C 6 source mac i i i dest mac 1 1 L 1 i C T vlan b 14094 priority o 7 C 8 ethernet type NN 0 65535 Rule C 9 vlan fo 1 4094 C 10 source mac 1 1 E Catdestma EEE C 12 priority o y C 13 protocol tep Yor protocol type p 0 255 14 vlan o 1 4094 source ip 0 0 0 0 C4s5 van O 14094 destip 0 0 0 0 C 16 vlan o 1 4094 tcp 7 source poto 0 65535 C 17 vlan NE 1 4094 fua y destpot o 0 65535 I rate o 64 65472 Kbps Action replaced vian 1 4094 replaced pri
97. Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the default gateway field again VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide ENET Port Setup The ENET Port Setup screen allows you to configure settings for the Ethernet ports To open this screen click Basic Setting ENET Port Setup Figure 43 ENET Port Setup a OIE NN Port Active Name Speed Mode Duplex ENET1 Yo lenerl 100 Copper y Full Duplex ENET2 M lenerz 100 Copper Full Duplex Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 ENET Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port index number Active Select the check box to turn on the port Clear it to disable the port Name Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port You can use up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are not allowed Speed Mode Select the type of Ethernet connection for this port When you don t use auto negotiation you must make sure that the settings of the peer Ethernet port are the same in order to connect Select Auto auto negotiation to have the IP DSLAM automatically determine the type of connection that the Ethernet port has When the peer Ethernet device has auto negotiation turned on the IP DSLAM negotiates with the peer to determine the connection speed If the peer Ethernet port does not have auto negotiation turned on the IP DSLAM determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using full duplex When an Et
98. D Static VLAN Settings The Number Of VLAN 1 Previous Page Next Page VLAN Port Setting Name VID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 44 35 48 432 48 38 20 21 22 22 24 enetl enet2 DEFAULT 1 40 4 40 0 4 40 0 4 0 40 10 0 U Us ws US ps bs 2005 pos pos S IRES pos po U Set Interval Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION The Number Of VLAN This is the number of VLANs configured on the IP DSLAM Page X of Y This identifies which page of VLAN status information is displayed and how many total pages of VLAN status information there are The first table displays the names of the fields The subsequent tables show the settings of the VLANs Index This is the VLAN index number Name VID The name identifies an individual VLAN The vid is the PVID the Port VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or priority tagged frames received on this port 1 24 enet1 enet2 These columns display the VLAN s settings for each port A tagged port is marked as T an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows that this VLAN was added to the IP DSLAM statically that is added as a permanent entry Poll Interval s
99. DSLAM before you begin this procedure This process requires partial disassembly of the IP DSLAM Only a qualified technician should perform this process Remove the power wires from the IP DSLAM Remove the IP DSLAM s top cover See the product specifications for the location of the fuse A burnt out fuse is blackened darkened or cloudy inside its glass casing A working fuse has a completely clear glass casing N o Use a small flat head screwdriver to carefully pry out the fuse from the fuse clip 4 Dispose of the burnt out fuse properly Installing a Fuse 1 Gently press the replacement fuse into the fuse clip until you hear a click 2 Replace the IP DSLAM s cover 3 Reconnect the power wires to the unit VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Appendix A Changing a Fuse VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2008 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any pr
100. E Generic Error 0 eoO 0 0 0 090 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 PPPoA to PPPoE Status LABEL DESCRIPTION PVC This field displays the port number VPI and VCI of the PVC Session Status Session State This field displays whether or not the current session is Up or Down Session ID This field displays the ID of the current session It displays 0 if there is no current session Session Uptime This field displays how long the current session has been up AC Name This field displays the hostname of the remote access concentrator if there are two access concentrators or BRAS on the network or if you want to allow PAE translation to the specified access concentrator Service Name This field specifies the name of the service that uses this PVC Counter Status Tx Rx The values in these columns are for packets transmitted t x or received rx by the IP DSLAM PPP LCP Config This field displays the number of config request PDUs received by the IP Request DSLAM from the CPE client device PPP LCP Echo This field displays the number of echo request PDUs received by the IP DSLAM Request from the CPE client device PPPLCP Echo This field displays the number of echo reply PDUs received by the IP DSLAM Reply from the CPE client device PPPoE PADI This field displays the number of padi PDUs sent by the IP DSLAM to the BRAS
101. INES sois 288 Part VI Appendices and Index eeeeeeee 289 Docs A Changho pun mt Tm 291 Append B Legal A 293 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Table of Contents VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide EN Table of Contents 22 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide List of Figures List of Figures gium ipe c A UU 34 Figure SE NNR ais PT 35 Figura 3 Dust Filter Loo lt ccciccsectcicconssmesatecossmuelintdanedcieiasernciedonmaed cveasneedcielaseenedeiammpcccnsainecieacimendoaens 41 Faure sd Dust Filter Tos tel DEL ar 42 AE PITS A A OL 0 SL 42 Figure 6 Attaching Rubber Feet e aN 43 Figure 7 Attaching Mounting Brackets and Screws 0 cccsceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeneeeeseaeeseeneeeseaaeseeneeeeaas 44 wid OCU iii 45 Fina IP DSLAM Prom POI Lodi AR 47 Pore TO GSEROEDBIICIBIC SIS quaesitis cruda bando abs cina ated a doce adn 49 Figure 11 uU icri A 50 Figure T2 Imsalleq Manta castes spss Ss sa anda Ses Dae Ehe brin ce ease baad pase nae die CRAS 50 Figure 13 Opening he Transceiver Latah suas la 50 Figure 14 Removing th TEagegl Vgl since 51 PRIS TOALARM FDS Layout a ae oat ADR cios 51 Figure 16 MDF Maini Distnibuton Frame ATINA oidor 53 Figure 17 Telco 50 Gable with TT Comactols siii o etn ie 54 Figure 18 Fan Module TRIMS HS nea A cx GER Eom uda Eee DEAS DEN RE ndi Eu UE 57 Figura 19 Removing the Fan Module conciencia ect 58 Figure 20 Fan Module ene aid 58 Fus ET Losses th ct
102. LAN on the IP DSLAM To open this screen click Advanced Application gt Multicast VLAN Figure 78 MVLAN Status 8 MVLAN Status MYLAN Status MVLAN Setup MYLAN Group Primary Port is ENET1 The Number Of MVLAN 1 Name VID Index 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ENETI Status 13 14 15 16 4 1 18 18 20 21 22 23 24 ENET2 1 VLAN100 EXAMPLE 100 Enable VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 23 Multicast VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 MVLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION The Number of This is the number of multicast VLAN configured on the IP DSLAM MVLAN The first table displays the names of the fields The subsequent tables show the settings for each multicast VLAN Index This is a sequential value and is not associated with this multicast VLAN Name VID This field shows the name and VLAN ID of this multicast VLAN 1 24 These fields display whether or not each port is a member of this multicast ENET1 2 VLAN V displays for members and displays for non members You can change these settings in the MVLAN Setup screen Status This field shows whether this multicast VLAN is active Enable or inactive Disable 23 3 MVLAN Setup Screen Use this screen to configure basic settings and port members for each multicast VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt Multicast VLAN gt MVLAN Setup Figure 79 MVLAN
103. LARM input pins or the IP DSLAM To signal an alarm the IP DSLAM opens the circuit for pins 1 and 6 the common pin and closes the circuit for pins 2 and 6 Examples of an alarm on the IP DSLAM are when the IP DSLAM s voltage or temperature is outside of the normal range Figure 15 ALARM Pins Layout Pin 5 Pin 1 Pin 9 Pin 6 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide E Chapter 3 Front Panel Connections 3 6 VDSL Connections Connect the lines from the user equipment VDSL ADSL modems to the VDSL Telco 50 connectors The line from the user carries both the VDSL and the voice signals For each line the IP DSLAM has a built in splitter that separates the high frequency VDSL signal from the voice band signal See Chapter 4 on page 53 for more information on the Telco 50 connections 52 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide MDF Connections This chapter shows you how to connect the Telco 50 connectors to an MDF 4 1 MDF Connections Overview Observe the following before you start See Chapter 54 on page 283 for the gauge of telephone wire to use Follow the pin assignments shown in Chapter 54 on page 283 to wire Telco 50 cables to Telco 50 connectors See Chapter 54 on page 283 for details on how to make the management connections 4 2 MDF Main Distribution Frame An MDF is usually installed between subscribers equipment and the telephone company CO in a basement or telephone room The MDF is the point of termina
104. M gt downstream noise margin xDSL port Link WARN A DSL port lost its connection Down SN lt seq no lt port gt port number seq no sequence number of the connection Session Begin INFO A console telnet or FTP session has begun see the process field for the type of session Session End INFO A console telnet or FTP session has terminated see the process field for the type of session Incorrect Password WAR Someone attempted to use the wrong password to start a console telnet or FTP session see the process field for the type of session Received Firmware WAR A checksum error was detected during an attempted FTP Checksum Error firmware upload Received Firmware Size WAR The file size was too large with an attempted FTP firmware too large upload Received Firmware WAR Someone attempted to upload a firmware file with a wrong Invalid identity via FTP Received File file INFO Afile was uploaded to the IP DSLAM by FTP file received file s name VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 265 Chapter 50 Diagnostics Table 113 Log Messages continued LOG MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION HERMO OVER WARN The temperature was too high at one of the temperature EMPERATURE dev id sensors threshold threshold id degree C 0 sensor near the D
105. MTU Size Figure 124 MTU A AT MTU Size 1526 1526 1600 Bytes default 1526 Bytes Apply Setting The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 91 MTU LABEL DESCRIPTION MTU Size Enter the size in bytes of the Maximum Transmission Unit MTU for the Ethernet interfaces The Ethernet interfaces discard any packets larger than this Apply Setting Click Apply Setting to save your MTU settings Clicking Apply Setting saves your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 42 MTU Size VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide OUI Filter This chapter describes how to configure a filter rule for each subscriber port to stop the IP DSLAM from forwarding traffic from specified devices based on OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier 43 1 The OUI Filter Screen Configure an OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier filter to block or forward packets from devices with the specified OUI in the MAC address The OUI field is the first three octets in a MAC address An OUI uniquely identifies the manufacturer of a network device and allows you to identify from which device brands the switch will accept traffic or send traffic to The OUI value is assigned by t
106. None button to clear all of the ports check boxes Add Click Add to save your settings The VLAN then displays in the summary table at the top of the screen Clicking Add saves your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh 19 5 VLAN Port Setting Screen Use this screen to specify port VLAN IDs and to set whether or not Ethernet ports propagate VLAN information to other devices To open this screen click Advanced Application VLAN VLAN Port Setting Figure 65 VLAN Port Setting REL VLAN Status Static VLAN Settings VLAN Port Setting Port PVID Priority ENET1 L 1 4094 o ENET2 1 24094 o 1 1 4094 os 2 1 1 4094 o 7 3 fi 1 4094 oF dose e ML X Sn m Apply Cancel Copy port fi Paste The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 VLAN Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Port The port numbers identify the IP DSLAM s ports PVID Type the Port VLAN ID PVID from 1 to 4094 The IP DSLAM assigns the PVID to untagged frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this port Priority Select an IEEE 802 1p priority to assign to untagged frames or priority frames 0 VID received on thi
107. P ARP NetBios DHCP EAPOL IGMP PPPoE Only al V V V Y V V Y 2 Y V V Y Y Y Y 3 Y Y V Y Y V y 4 V V y y V The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Packet Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select an xDSL port for which you wish to configure packet type filtering This box is read only after you click on one of the port numbers in the table below PPPoE Only Select this to allow only PPPoE traffic This will gray out the check boxes for other packet types and the system will drop any non PPPoE packets Select the check boxes of the types of packets to accept on the xDSL port When you clear one of these check boxes the field label changes to Filter Out and the system drops the corresponding type of packets PPPoE Pass Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet relies on PPP and Ethernet It is a through specification for connecting the users on an Ethernet to the Internet through a common broadband medium such as a single xDSL line wireless device or cable modem IP Pass through Internet Protocol The underlying protocol for routing packets on the Internet and other TCP IP based networks VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 24 Packet Filtering Table 46 Packet Filter continued LABEL DESCRIPTION ARP Pass through Address Resolution Protocol is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical computer address
108. P Port The default port of the RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Enable Local Select this check box to have the IP DSLAM use its internal database of user Authentication names and passwords to authenticate users Name Type the user name of the user profile Password Type a password up to 31 characters long for this user profile Retype Type the password again to make sure you have entered it properly Password to confirm VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 27 Port Authentication Table 52 RADIUS continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configurin
109. PBO ESEL 0 0 0 dB UPBOESEL 0 0 0 dB DPBOEPSD Break Point Tone Index Frequency PSD level 0 1 4 3125 kHz 60 0 dBm 1 32 138 0 kHz 60 0 dBm 2 33 142 3125 kHz 40 0 dBm 3 255 1099 6875 kHz 40 0 dBm 4 376 1595 6250 kHz 50 0 dBm 5 511 2203 6875 kHz 51 5 dBm 6 512 2208 0 kHz 80 0 dBm DPBOESCMA 256 scalar value 0 0 DPBOESCMB 512 scalar value 1 DPBOESCMC 256 scalar value 0 DPBOMUS 180 90 0 dBm Hz DPBOFMIN 0 0 0 kHz DPBOFMAX 511 2203 6875 kHz UPBO Parameters A B Upstream Band 1 5650 56 50 dBm Hz 1019 10 19 dBm Hz VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 54 Product Specifications Table 132 Default Settings continued Upstream Band 2 5650 56 50 dBm Hz 614 6 14 dBm Hz Upstream Band 3 0 0 0 dBm Hz 0 0 0 dBm Hz 54 3 Pin Assignments 54 3 1 Hardware Telco 50 Connector Pin Assignments Connect to the IP DSLAM s CO 1 24 and USER 1 24 ports using cables that have Telco 50 connectors with the following pin assignments Figure 157 CO 1 24 and USER 1 24 Telco 50 Pin Assignments CO 124 USER 1 24 I elo CUDTUTUUTD0T70T0U0707070U 07075nuu 5070707077 DDD DDD DDD III NNNNN hs e ead esci gt a NNNNN HSH HK SK c0 4C NJ CO 9 00 LionUnExgio3ow 9 RIO EN DONDA UWP HO ASS 54 3 2 Console Cable Pin Assignments The following diagrams and chart show the pin assi
110. PVLAN 8 Number of VLANs 16 IGMP groups per DSL port 16 GMP host IPs per DSL port 16 IGMP host IPs per Ethernet port 1024 Number of DHCP snooping 32 DHCP snooping static IP pool entries 3 e Number of joined MVLANSs 4 Number of ACL profile mappings 8 System Number of user accounts 16 Number of trap destinations 4 Number of secured client groups 16 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 54 Product Specifications Number of Telnet sessions 5 Number of VLANs 1024 Number of DSL profiles 128 Number of ATM profiles 96 Number of IGMP filter profiles 128 Number of IGMP proxy static query VLANs 16 Number of DSL alarm profiles 8 Number of Dot1X profiles 64 Number of DHCP relay servers 32 Number of IP routes 128 Number of static multicast addresses 32 Number of multicast group ranges per MVLAN 16 Number of multicast bandwidth control groups 96 Number of IGMP groups 512 groups Number of learned MAC addresses up to 4k entries Number of RPVC gateway IP addresses 96 Number of RPVC routing entries 96 Number of ACL profiles 128 Number of PPPoE Intermediate Agents 48 Number of VLAN Isolations 16 Number of MAC force forwarding entries 64 54 2 Default Settings This section lists the default configuration of the IP DSLAM Table 132 Default Settings Address Default In band IP Address 192 168 1 1 Defa
111. PoE Intermediate Agent sub option includes the system name or IP address slot ID port number VPI and VCI on which the TCP IP configuration request was received The following figure shows the format of the TR 101 PPPoE Intermediate Agent sub option The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub option The next field specifies the length of the field The hostname field displays the system name if it has been configured the extra information field A if the hostname was not configured or the IP address in dotted decimal notation w x y z if neither the system name nor the extra information field was been configured In either case the hostname is truncated to 23 characters and trailing spaces are discarded The hostname field is followed by a space the string atm and another space Then a 1 byte Slot ID field specifies the ingress slot number and a 1 byte Port No field specifies the ingress port number Next the VPI and VCI denote the virtual circuit that received the PPPoE message from the subscriber The slot ID port number VPI VCI are separated from each other by a forward slash colon or period An example is SYSNAME atm 0 10 0 33 Table 88 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Sub option Format TR 101 for VDSL 1 N hostname A IP Port No en Slot ID 7 Table 89 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Sub option Format TR 101 for ADSL hostname A IP
112. RFI bands on the system 16 4 4 Frequency Band Plan Each VDSL mode operates in a different frequency band allocation resulting in different upstream and downstream speeds Your Device automatically changes the band plan based on the loop condition and loop length A band plan example is shown next Band plans include an optional band between 25 kHz and 276 kHz controlled by limit PSD mask The optional band is used for upstream transmission which is to be negotiated during line initiation The optional band frequency for example the positions of x and y in the following figure varies depending on the limit PSD mask you use VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 16 xDSL Port Setup Figure 44 A Band Plan Example uso DS1 US1 DS2 US2 y 8 5 I2 Frequency 3 75 5 2 WU X The sample of optional band PSD mask and associated frequency band used in the Device is shown next Table 15 Optional band PSD Mask LIMIT PSD MASK OPTIONAL BAND FREQUENCY nusO d32 No optional band eu32 d32 25 138 kHz eu36_d48 25 155 25 kHz The eu number in the limit PSD mask is a tone index A tone spacing 4 3125 KHz is used for VDSL2 profile from 8a up to 17a So eu32 means the optional band ending at around 138 kHz See more information in Section 16 4 5 on page 101 16 4 5 VDSL2 Profiles ITU T G993 2 defines eight VDSL2 profiles 8a 8b 8c 8d 12a 12b 17a a
113. SL chipset value temp degr 1 sensor near the CPU c 2 thermal sensor chip itself threshold threshold temperature temp temperature when the entry was logged HERMO OVER INFO The temperature at one of the temperature sensors has come EMPERATURE released back to normal dev id id threshold threshold 0 sensor near the DSL chipset degree C 1 sensor near the CPU Hex temp degr 2 thermal sensor chip itself threshold threshold temperature temp temperature when the entry was logged THERMO OVER VOLTAGE WARN The voltage went outside of the accepted operating range nominal lt nominal gt mV nominal nominal voltage of the DC power value lt voltage gt mV voltage voltage of the DC power when logged THERMO OVER VOLTAGE INFO The voltage is back inside the accepted operating range released nominal nominal voltage of the DC power nominal nominal mV voltage voltage of the DC power when logged value voltage mV 50 3 LDM Test Parameters The following table lists the line diagnostics test parameters that display see the ITU T s G 992 3 for more information Table 114 LDM Test Parameters LABEL DESCRIPTION number of subcarries Discrete Multi Tone DMT modulation divides up a line s bandwidth into sub carriers sub channels of 4 3125 KHz each The first number is the tot
114. SLAM supports the IEEE 802 1x standard for centralized user authentication and accounting management through an optional network authentication RADIUS server MAC Media Access Control Count Filter You can limit the number of MAC addresses that may be dynamically learned on a port You may enable disable the MAC count filter on individual ports DHCP Relay DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the system as a DHCP relay agent to have another DHCP server provide TCP IP configuration for the clients In addition you can set the system to forward client DHCP requests to specific DHCP servers based on the VLAN ID You can also specify up to two DHCP servers for each VLAN to provide fail over protection VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the IP DSLAM DHCP Relay Option 82 The system supports DHCP relay agent82 RFC 3046 that adds additional information to client DHCP requests that the IP DSLAM relays to a DHCP server It also supports adding the sub option 2 Remote ID with additional information DHCP Snooping DHCP snooping allows the system to identify packets with DHCP server assigned IP address es and block access of devices using unknown IP addresses on a subscriber port You can also manually add static IP addresses to the DHCP snooping table 2684 Routed Mode The IP DSLAM c
115. SM Seed DSCP Map 802 1P Priority oon e on n oo Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 68 DSCP Map LABEL DESCRIPTION Source DSCP This field displays each DSCP value 802 1P Priority Enter the IEEE 802 1p priority to which you would like to map this DSCP value Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide TLS PVC This chapter shows you how to set up Transparent LAN Service VLAN stacking Q in Q on each port 34 1 Transparent LAN Service TLS Overview Transparent LAN Service also known as VLAN stacking or Q in Q allows a service provider to distinguish multiple customers VLANS even those with the same customer assigned VLAN ID within its network Use TLS to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This allows a service provider to provide different services based on specific VLANs for many different customers A service provider s customers may require a
116. SM 85 USO cca gt D 87 CMM O a A 91 lut al m 95 ENET Por Delgado p abbia erence aane d Pb nad de pb 97 A SUB E eee taxis d Ostia tivo dE ODER deccm ior AAE cad dac bue Ct Uf 99 XDSL Pres STS a a 117 DOLE UU Apc ii o a a A AAA M 125 Advanced A a 131 A OO 133 Frona YLAN Rr Pm ES 139 ci eR 141 Sae KUNST RENT 151 utc ee IT 153 Packet Pee NT T T T TR 157 oM SLT ANNE 159 Rapid Spamming Tree Prologo c 161 mons DIEI DU a IIIS 167 AEE T E EE EE TES 171 DHCP REIGI a aana aaO E a 173 o A E but lass danas A A N A E A E A EE T 177 2084 RONO NOUE Get Tes 181 PPPOA Te PPPOE 3st elena ios 189 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide EN Contents Overview p p n 195 Hber rr cde TRE 197 Double Tagging DT em 203 rr OM O UNT MES 207 Be a eT cnE Dico ct aaa 213 Ups ream BROS AST M 215 o A A E Pio pk bn O osi ca E dvo GU Gr Dp A ade Hubs DO lc idi Ced 217 toe cci CONTO Mr E ETT 219 mimic Au a 225 A A cox cto sedan tenet dv abes bf Tenner nen DX TUR ode OR QUE ue IUE uber Raul pM OL torr 229 edgl e M 231 rl roo 233 Ruin Me T Mm 237 MAG Fore Fonera aaria cte 241 Routing Protocol Alarm and Management eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenennnnnnn nnn 247 ri edle Ti Me
117. U N Poll Interval s 40 5s 14 850 12 150 e000 2000 5s 1 375 1 125 sooo 2000 1 320 1 080 1 980 1 620 Set Interval Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 System Info LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name This field displays the device s model name Software F W Version This field displays the version number of the device s current firmware including the date created DSP Code Version This field displays the current Digital Signal Processor firmware version number This is the modem code firmware Hardware Version This is the version of the physical device hardware Serial Number This is the individual identification number assigned to the device at the factory Ethernet Address This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the device Hardware Monitor Enable Select this check box to turn the hardware monitor on or clear it to turn the hardware monitor off Temperature Unit Select C to display all temperature measurements in degrees Celsius Select F to display all temperature measurements in degrees Fahrenheit Temperature C Each temperature sensor can detect and report the temperature Temperature sensor 1 is near the DSL chipset Temperature sensor 2 is near the central processing unit Temperature sensor 3 is at the hardware monitor chip Current This shows the current tempera
118. Use this screen to upgrade your device firmware See the System Info screen to verify your current firmware version number Make sure you have downloaded and unzipped the correct model firmware and version to your computer before uploading to the device Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device To open this screen click Management gt Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade Figure 145 Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade g To upgrade the switch s firmware browse to the location ofthe binary BIN file and click the upgrade button File Path Browse Upgrade VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 49 Maintenance Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the device in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it After you have specified the file click Upgrade 49 3 Restore Configuration Screen Use this screen to load a configuration file from your computer to the device To open this screen click Management Maintenance Restore Text Configuration Figure 146 Restore Configuration a Restore Configuration d To restore the device s configuration from a file browse to the location of the configuration file and click Restore button File Path Browse Restore Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to dis
119. VC Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Select Do the following to remove one or more PVCs Delete 1 Select a PVC s Select radio button 2 Click Delete 3 Click OK if you want to remove the PVC from other ports Click Cancel to only remove the one you selected Figure 53 Basic Setting gt xDSL Port Setup gt VC Setup gt Delete x 2 Do you want to delete this channel in other ports too Cancel 4 If you clicked OK the following screen appears 5 Select to which ports you want to copy the settings Use All to select every port Use None to clear all of the check boxes 6 Click Apply to delete the channels Figure 54 Select Ports Z Web Configurator ras 192 168 11 Please select ports and click apply button 0 1 2 3 4 a w amp t E Ye 1 9 E 0 0 0 T T Tti 1243 S G o a BB DB B DB B 24050000 opi conca VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 16 xDSL Port Setup Table 22 VC Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Select Do the following to copy settings from one PVC to another port or ports Copy 1 Click the Select radio button of the PVC from which you want to copy Paste settings 2 Click Paste 3 The following screen appears 4 Select to which ports you want to copy the settings Use All to select every port Use None to clear all of the check boxes 5 Click Apply to copy the settings Figure 55 Select Ports EDEIUTERUENEUXUYUUS sx Please
120. VDSL Voice Troubleshooting STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION Ensure that the subscriber s VDSL is working normally Make sure the subscriber has a POTS splitter properly installed Check the VDSL line pin assignments shown in Chapter 54 on page 283 Check the telephone wire connections between the subscriber and the MDF s Check the telephone wire and connections between the MDF s and VDSL port s Check the telephone wire mapping on the MDF s Make sure the in house wiring works and is connected properly o NI O a A O N Repeat the steps above using a different VDSL port VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 277 Chapter 53 Troubleshooting 53 8 Local Server The computer behind a DSL modem or router cannot access a local server connected to the IP DSLAM Table 125 Troubleshooting a Local Server STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 See Section 53 6 on page 277 to make sure that the subscriber is able to transmit to the IP DSLAM 2 Make sure the computer behind the DSL device has the correct gateway IP address configured Check the VLAN configuration see Chapter 19 on page 133 Check the cable and connections between the IP DSLAM and the local server Try to access another local server If data can be transmitted to a different local server the local server that could not be accessed may have a problem 53 9 Data Rate The SYNC rate is not the same as
121. VES 1624F T 55A 24 port VDSL2 remote IP DSLAM User s Guide Version 3 53 9 2008 Edition 1 DEFAULT LOGIN IP Address http 192 168 0 1 Out of band MGMT port http 192 168 1 1 In band ports User Name admin Password 1234 ZyXE WWW zyxel com About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the IP DSLAM using the web configurator You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP IP networking concepts and topology Related Documentation LES It is recommended you use the web configurator to configure the IP DSLAM Supporting Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents ZyXEL Web Site Please refer to www zyxel com for additional support documentation and product certifications User Guide Feedback Help us help you Send all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to the following address or use e mail instead Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan E mail techwriters 9 zyxel com tw VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 3 Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide gt Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your IP DSLAM BS Notes tell you other import
122. VLAN settings Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group Delete Select the check boxes of the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button You cannot delete a VLAN if any PVIDs are set to use the VLAN or the VLAN is the CPU management VLAN Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes Active Select this check box to enable the VLAN You cannot disable a VLAN if any PVIDs are set to use the VLAN or the VLAN is the CPU management VLAN Name Enter a descriptive name for this VLAN group for identification purposes Spaces are not allowed VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static VLAN entry the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Port The port numbers identify the IP DSLAM s ports VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 19 VLAN Table 31 Static VLAN Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Control Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group Use the Select All button to include every port Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group Use the Select All button to include every port Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN ID Use the All button to include every port Use the
123. VLAN100 EXAMPLE Enable Start Multicast IP End Multicast IP Select 224 1 1 0 224 1 1 255 O MYLAN Group 100 ni 0 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 MVLAN Group LABEL DESCRIPTION MVLAN ID Select the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN for which you want to configure a range of multicast IP addresses Index Select the index number of the multicast VLAN group the range of multicast IP addresses you want to configure for this multicast VLAN If you want to change the current settings select an index number that already exists If you want to add a new multicast VLAN group select an index number that does not exist Start Multicast IP Enter the beginning of the range of multicast IP addresses The IP address must be a valid multicast IP address between 224 0 0 0 and 239 255 255 255 End Multicast IP Enter the end of the range of multicast IP addresses The IP address must be a valid multicast IP address between 224 0 0 0 and 239 255 255 255 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields af
124. Wuerselen Germany Hungary Support E mail support 2 zyxel hu e Sales E mail info zyxel hu Telephone 36 1 3361649 Fax 36 1 3259100 Web www zyxel hu Regular Mail ZyXEL Hungary 48 Zoldlomb Str H 1025 Budapest Hungary India Support E mail support zyxel in e Sales E mail sales zyxel in Telephone 91 11 30888144 to 91 11 30888153 Fax 91 11 30888149 91 11 26810715 Web http www zyxel in Regular Mail India ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd II Floor F2 9 Okhla Phase 1 New Delhi 110020 India e Support E mail support zyxel co jp Sales E mail zyp zyxel co jp Telephone 81 3 6847 3700 Fax 81 3 6847 3705 Web www zyxel co jp Regular Mail ZyXEL Japan 3F Office T amp U 1 10 10 Higashi Gotanda Shinagawa ku Tokyo 141 0022 Japan Kazakhstan Support http zyxel kz support Sales E mail sales zyxel kz Telephone 7 3272 590 698 Fax 7 3272 590 689 Web www zyxel kz Regular Mail ZyXEL Kazakhstan 43 Dostyk Ave Office 414 Dostyk Business Centre 050010 Almaty Republic of Kazakhstan VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Appendix C Customer Support Malaysia Support E mail support zyxel com my Sales E mail sales zyxel com my Telephone 603 8076 9933 Fax 603 8076 9833 Web http www zyxel com my Regular Mail ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd 1 02 amp 1 03 Jalan Kenari 17F Bandar Puchong Jaya 47100 Puchong Selangor Darul Ehsan Ma
125. X auto 1 3 enabled DEFVAL MAX auto 1 4 enabled DEFVAL MAX auto 1 5 enabled DEFVAL MAX auto 1 enabled The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 xDSL Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Copy Port Do the following to copy settings from one DSL port to another DSL port or Paste ports 1 Select the number of the DSL port from which you want to copy settings 2 Select the settings that you want to copy 3 Click Paste and the following screen appears 4 Select to which ports you want to copy the settings Use All to select every port Use None to clear all of the check boxes 5 Click Apply to paste the settings Figure 48 Select Ports Z Web Configurator ras 192 168 11 AA el E Please select ports and click apply button 1 r r r Active Select this check box to copy this port s active setting This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 16 9 1 on page 106 Customer Info Select this check box to copy this port s subscriber information This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 16 9 1 on page 106 Customer Tel Select this check box to copy this port s subscriber s telephone number This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 16 9 1 on page 106 Advanced Features Select this check box to copy this port s VDSL feature settings These are configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 16 9 1 on page 106 VES 1
126. ad a ace E a 209 ise Ls eM TUE 211 NECI AL Prol cum EET 212 Tabe 79 DowisbeamiBrogadcas e 213 is gal e la AA OE A 215 HE cara 5g Bode Em 217 Tete FS Access Control SUIT A ena dad ua a deca ER a nuu adu tas 219 Table 80 SNMP Commando sadi dn i as rie FEE epp UR rp RUE Y dO BE VR end taeda 220 TASAS BSW TADE cor 221 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide List of Tables Med SRP Meer a A 222 TAE SS SEACE ACER MEN sr os isa Ona 223 Table 84 Remote Management Secured Client Setup 224 Table 85 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Vendor specific Tag Format cccsseccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 225 Table 86 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Vendor specific Tag Format cccsscccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeees 225 Table 87 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Remote ID Sub option Format ssssssesseee 225 Table 88 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Sub option Format TR 101 for VDSL sss 226 Table 89 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Sub option Format TR 101 for ADSL sss 226 Tablo 90 PPPoE Intermedite AUGE lt A 227 TRIGO IEEE ena adan 229 pc cie MEI iaa 231 jk xoa e P 234 NER CRI qt eR 234 Table 95 Link Aggregation ID Local IP DSLAM cnn a 238 Table 96 Link Aggregation ID Peer IP DSLAM ssssssssssssseeeeeeennee entente ninth sinn nn 238 Tuble 97 SiC EDU DRESS adidas 239 TUe 88 DOTS aR Sua griaa andan senna da 240 Table 99 MAC
127. ain protocol traffic Priority This field displays the priority for the protocol VLAN Select Select the radio button of a VLAN membership entry and then use the Delete but Delete ton to remove an entry VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide IGMP This chapter describes the IGMP screens 21 1 IGMP Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender to 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data See RFC 1112 RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1 2 and 3 respectively 21 2 IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4 a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts multicast group in a different sub network A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group not individual receiving devices IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes see the IANA web site for more information 21 2 1 IGMP Snooping A layer 2 switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query Report and Leave IGMP version 2 or 3 packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to lear
128. al number of DMT sub carriers the DSL connection is using The second number indicates how many upstream DMT sub carriers the DSL connection is using hlinScale The channel characteristics function is represented in linear format by a scale factor and a complex number These are the maximum upstream and downstream scale factors used in producing the channel characteristics function latn This is the upstream and downstream Line Attenuation in dB satn This is the upstream and downstream Signal Attenuation in dB snrm This is the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio Margin in dB A DMT sub carrier s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power The signal to noise ratio margin is the maximum that the received noise power could increase with the IP DSLAM still being able to meet its transmission targets attndr This is the upstream and downstream Attainable Net Data Rate in bit s VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 50 Diagnostics Table 114 LDM Test Parameters continued LABEL DESCRIPTION farEndActatp This is the upstream and downstream Far End Actual Aggregate Transmit Power in dBm i This is the index number of the DMT sub carrier Lisni The channel characteristics function is represented in linear format by a scale factor and a complex number This is the real part of the complex number used in produc
129. an external RADIUS database using the settings below local then radius Search the local database if the user name is not found check an external RADIUS database using the settings below IP Enter the IP address of the external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation Port The default UDP port of the RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Secret Specify a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the IP DSLAM This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the IP DSLAM Default Privilege Level Select the privilege level assigned to administrators in case the external RADIUS database does not provide one The privilege level determines which screens the administrator can use There is a high medium or low privilege level for each command You can also choose to deny access to the IP DSLAM Select high to allow the administrator to use all commands including the lower privilege commands High privilege commands include things like creating administrator accounts restarting the system and resetting the factory defaults Select middle to allow the administrator to use middle or low privilege commands Select low to allow the administrator to use only low privilege commands Low privilege commands are read only Sel
130. an handle 2684 routed mode traffic PPPoA to PPPoE PAE PVC This feature allows the system to translate PPPoA packets to PPPoE packets and vice versa to allow communication between CPE clients and an access concentrator such as a BRAS through the IP DSLAM DSCP to IEEE 802 1p Priority Mapping DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets with DiffServ Code Points DSCP so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route You can configure DSCP to IEEE 802 1p mappings to allow the IP DSLAM to prioritize all incoming traffic based on the DSCP value according to the mapping table Transparent LAN Service TLS Use TLS also known as VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This allows a service provider to provide different services based on specific VLANs for many different customers Downstream Broadcast The IP DSLAM can block downstream broadcast packets from being sent to specified VLANs on specified ports Upstream Broadcast Rate Limiting Rate Limiting on the subscriber ports allows service providers to offer tiered service in increments of 32 Kbps This service differentiation is not only to fulfill the needs of different customers b
131. ancel to start configuring the screen again 31 3 2684 Routed Domain Screen Use this screen to configure domains for 2684 routed mode traffic The domain is the range of IP addresses behind the subscriber s device the CPE This includes the CPE device s LAN IP addresses and the IP addresses of the LAN computers To open this screen click Advanced Application gt 2684 Routed Mode gt Routed Domain Figure 99 2684 Routed Domain C 2684 Routed Domain Routed PVC Routed Domain RPVC ARP Proxy Routed Gateway Port 1 y YPI o VCI 0 IP 0 0 0 0 NetMask 0 1 32 Add Cancel Index Port VPI VCI IP NetMask Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 2684 Routed Domain LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to configure settings VPI Type the Virtual Path Identifier for this routed PVC VCI Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for this routed PVC IP Enter the subscriber s CPE LAN IP address in dotted decimal notation NetMask The bit number of the subnet mask of the subscriber s IP address To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary and add all of the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1 s in binary There are three 255 s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 31 2684 Routed Mode Table
132. and Specifications bleshooting 275 ifications 283 274 Troubleshooting This chapter covers potential problems and possible remedies After each problem description some steps are provided to help you to diagnose and solve the problem 53 1 The SYS or PWR LED Does Not Turn On The SYS PWR LED does not turn on Table 118 SYS LED Troubleshooting STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Make sure the power wires are properly connected to the power supply and the power supply is operating normally Make sure you are using the correct power source see Chapter 54 on page 283 Make sure the power wires are connected properly Make sure a fuse is not burnt out Replace a fuse if it is burnt out See Appendix A on page 291 for instructions The LED itself or the unit may be faulty contact your vendor 53 2 The ALM LED Is On The ALM alarm LED lights when the IP DSLAM is overheated the fans are not working properly the voltage readings are outside the tolerance levels or an alarm has been detected on the ALARM input pins Table 119 ALM LED Troubleshooting STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Use the statistics monitor command to verify the cause of the alarm See step 2 if the unit is overheated step 3 if the problem is with the fans and step 4 if the voltages are out of the allowed ranges Ensure that the IP DSLAM is installed in a well ventilated area and that normal operation of the fans
133. anges if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Blocking Table Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to display settings Index This field displays the number of the downstream broadcast blocking entry VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 213 Chapter 37 Downstream Broadcast Table 76 Downstream Broadcast continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the number of an xDSL port through which you will block downstream broadcast traffic on a specific VLAN VLAN This field displays the number of a VLAN to which you do not want to send broadcast traffic on the entry s port Select Select an entry s Select check box and click Delete to remove the entry Clicking Delete saves your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Select All Click All to mark all of the check boxes Select None Click None to un mark all of the check boxes VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Upstream Broadcast 38 1 Upstream Broadcast Screen Upstream broadcast allows you to define the maximum data transmission rate for upstream broadcast traffic allowed
134. ant information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The VES 1624FT 55A may be referred to as the IP DSLAM the device the system or the product in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on e g is a shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in other words VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The IP DSLAM icon is not an exact representation of your IP DSLAM
135. arding Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network number bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 101 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 8 bits 255 0 0 0 24 bits Det p 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 216_2 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 8 bits 28 2 254 29 bits 255 255 255 248 3 bits 23 9 6 Notation Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations Table 102 Alt
136. armful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning ERRE Se ARRAY li TE Ji ie A e EIERN T ASS REE EE SHS Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASS 1 PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040 10 ET 1040 11 Viewing Certifications 1 Goto http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials Zy XEL will at its discretion re
137. ates a syslog entry when one of these thresholds is exceeded A value of 0 disables the alarm threshold 15 Min LOF This field sets the limit for the number of Loss Of Frame seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min LOS This field sets the limit for the number of Loss Of Signal seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min LOL This field sets limit for the number of Loss Of Link seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min LPR This field sets the limit for the number of Loss of Power on the XTUR seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min ES This field sets the limit for the number of Errored Seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min SESL This field sets the limit for the number of Severely Errored seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min UASL This field sets the limit for the number of UnAvailable seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes 122 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 17 xDSL Profiles Setup Table 25 Alarm Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Init Failure Trap Select this to trigger an alarm for an initialization failure trap Alarm profiles with xDSL port mapping After you add an alarm profile you can click a port number s symbol to map the xDSL port to that alarm profile The port s V symbol in the alarm profile where it wa
138. ault configuration To do this click Management gt Maintenance gt Restore Default Configuration Figure 147 Restore Default Configuration Microsoft Internet Explorer x 2 Restore default configurations and reboot the system Cancel Click OK to begin resetting all device configurations to the factory defaults and then wait for the device to restart This takes up to two minutes If you want to access the device web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address 192 168 1 1 Figure 148 Restore Factory Default Settings Reboot x A rebooting please close this session then reconnect later 49 6 Reboot System Use this function to restart the device without physically turning the power off To open this screen click Management gt Maintenance gt Click here Reboot System VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 49 Maintenance Figure 149 Reboot System x Are you sure you want to reboot system J Cancel Click OK You then see the screen as shown in Figure 148 on page 261 Click OK again and wait for the device to restart This takes up to two minutes This does not affect the device s configuration 49 7 Command Line FTP See the VES DSLAM CLI Reference Guide for how to upload or download files to or from the device using FTP commands VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Dia
139. ay statistics about a VDSL port To open this screen click a VDSL port s number in the Home screen VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 9 Home and Port Statistics Screens Figure 35 Port Statistics VDSL Port Statistics xDSL Port 3 Port Name Tx packets Rx packets Tx uni packets Rx uni packets Tx nonuni packets Rx nonuni packets Tx discard packets Rx discard packets Errors Tx rate Rx rate Tx bytes Rx bytes VPI VCI Tx Packets Rx Packets Tx rate Rx rate Errors Poll Interval S Port OEE vdsl 0 598 eo uo AAA s RMON 2 Wh CO ow w oo oo o ooo e cn 0 33 z oo o o o amp i i Set Interval stop Reset I Clear Counter The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Port Statistics VDSL LABEL DESCRIPTION Up Click this to go back to the Home screen xDSL Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to view statistics This field identifies the port described in this screen Port Name This field displays the name that you have configured for the port If you have not configured a name it is blank Tx packets This field shows the number of packets transmitted on this port Rx packets This field shows the number of packets received on this port Tx uni packets This field shows the number of unicast packets transmitted on this port Rx uni packe
140. b Sua do eeu CUIRE RUM 146 2137 IGMP Fiter Froiile a miM idas 147 2189 IGNI Pat GIDUD SEGEN uicsoxemercuraesa da aentrd atio Uia de aa addin Gite tat RUE aan 148 2USIGNP Parn Iho Sareari si ida 149 PITO IGMP CONE Sereen rr idas 149 Chapter 22 A A TE DELETE cea 151 PP A 151 22 2 SLANG OMICS SO beis 151 Chapter 23 AICA ALAN ol 153 23 1 Multicast VLAN Overview a ia 153 23 9 MYLAN Salus OOO acia 153 2303 MILAN SEDE SETS Leona dier c pu a bc boni a bp obra eee and prb e 154 ZO MEAM Group SOSEN qiie cse bbecin ES rObi p ddbiterinddi ea 155 Chapter 24 lu iu c E 157 PAT Packet Fiter OI senda 157 Chapter 25 MAGC Filler IT UTE 159 291 MAC Filer WRT WT 2asctesivi et ba ed aeo ooo odes n rada daa a 159 20 2 MAC Filer GOGO cc casccocicdccuctaddccddractidondaneeadie doagebabascosnee ocu oec PAL DRE Ea blqu s aeri 159 Chapter 26 Rapid Spanning Tree Protacol 1 Lernen crc eee anaana niin aeaaea 161 ZW Mo cbe Bs f OTT 161 vp 2 RSTP Blu SOIT Hicon eae aaccasave E E oe sac tenegemacedooeenalecdbasedaden 163 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 145 Table of Contents EDO BSI CODIO SES cota Gmina dean a d deb PG rb aac 164 Chapter 27 x ifi 167 22 Inypduction To HTC DH uses su uu odd oio cena is 167 IAM I RADU ce M i 167 27 1 2 Introduction to Local User Database suicide ida
141. ccess Control address Flush Click Flush to remove all of the entries from the ARP table 31 5 2684 Routed Gateway Screen Use this screen to configure gateway settings To open this screen click Advanced Application 2684 Routed Mode Routed Gateway Figure 101 2684 Routed Gateway D 2684 Routed Gateway ng Routed PVC Routed Domain RPVCARPProxy Routed Gateway Gateway IP 0 0 0 0 VID 1 4094 Priority 0 0 7 default 0 Add Index Gateway IP VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 2684 Routed Gateway LABEL DESCRIPTION Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway to which you want to send the traffic that the system receives from this PVC Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation VID Specify a VLAN Identifier to add to Ethernet frames that the system routes to this gateway Priority Select the IEEE 802 1p priority 0 7 to add to the traffic that you send to this gateway VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 31 2684 Routed Mode Table 64 2684 Routed Gateway continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring I
142. ced Application gt MACFF screen Note that 32 entered in the NetMask field indicates a single subscriber device is included Figure 133 MAC Force Forwarding Configuration Example 1 A ORD MAC Force Forwarding MACFF ARP Proxy Index 1 y VID 100 ARIAS IP 192 168 1 254 192 168 1 10 32 1 32 Apply Cancel Index VID AR AS IP SRC IP Mask IP Select Delete Select AM None Example 2 Source is a Range of IPs or a Subnet BS If you want to force all traffic between subscribers 1 8 and the server S to go through AR you can have the following settings Note that 28 entered in the NetMask field indicates fifteen subscriber devices are included You have to calculate the netmask depending on the number of IP addresses you want to include in a MAC force forwarding rule VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 46 MAC Force Forwarding Figure 134 MAC Force Forwarding Configuration Example 2 MAC Force Forwarding AC END MACFF ARP Proxy Deve Index 1 y VID ARIAS IP 192 168 1 254 SRC IP 192 168 1 10 NetMask 28 1 32 Apply Cancel Index VID AR AS IP SRC IP Mask IP Select Select All None Furthermore if you want to force all traffic between subscribers 9 16 and the server S through AR2 you can add one more rule as shown Note that 27 entered in the NetMask field indicates that thirty one subscriber devices are included You can then monitor separated t
143. check box to turn on IEEE 802 1x authentication on this port VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 27 Port Authentication Table 53 802 1x continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Control Select AUTO to authenticate all subscribers before they can access the network through this port Select FORCE AUTHORIZED to allow all connected users to access the network through this port without authentication Select FORCE UNAUTHORIZED to deny all subscribers access to the network through this port Reauthentication Specify whether a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port On or not Off Reauthentication Specify how often in seconds a client has to re enter his or her username and Period s password to stay connected to the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Port Security This chapter shows you how to set up port security 28 1 Port Security Overview Port security allows you to restrict the number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port The IP DSLAM can learn up to 4K MAC addresses in total
144. ctors to the subscribers Dimensions 1 5 U 439 8 mm W x 251 mm D x 66 mm H Weight 4 6 kg 10 1 Ibs Wire Gauge Specifications The following table shows the specifications for wire gauge Table 130 Wire Gauge Specifications WIRE TYPE REQUIRED AWG NO DIAMETER Ground Wire 18 or larger Telephone Wire 26 or larger AWG American Wire Gauge is a measurement system for wire that specifies its thickness As the thickness of the wire increases the AWG number decreases Power Input 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 3 A maximum Power Consumption 64 W maximum VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 54 Product Specifications Fuse Rating gt Changing the IP DSLAM s fuses requires partial disassembly of the device Only a qualified technician should perform this process The following table describes the location and specification of the IP DSLAM s fuses Table 131 Fuse Specifications FUSE LOCATION FUSE RATING On AC to DC power supply 250 VAC T4A 5 20 ALARM Port Power The maximum power rating for the ALARM port is as follows nput 20 V 500 mA Output 20 V 500 mA Operating Environment Temperature 10 60 C Humidity 10 95 non condensing Storage Environment Temperature 40 70 C Humidity 5 95 non condensing Maximum Values Per DSL port Number of MAC filters 10 Number of OUI filters 10 Number of PVCs 4Number of
145. d CIR CBS Committed Burst Size This is the guaranteed burst size for the downstream traffic flowing through the IP DSLAM when the burst data rate is smaller than the predefined CIR IPQoS Profile Screen Click Basic Settings gt xDSL Profile Setup gt IPQos Profile to open the following screen Use this screen to configure the number of queues and QoS Quality of Service profile settings for each queue Use the second section of the screen to add or edit IPQoS profiles The first section of the screen lists the configured IPQoS profiles Figure 57 IPQoS Profile A OLS xDSL Profile IPQos Profile Alarm Profile Index Name Select 1 DEFVAL ol Modify Delete Name Number of Queues fi Y Queue Id PIR CIR PBS CBS Level Weight 128 32768 64 16384 3072 65536 3072 65536 0 7 1 127 0 32768 kbps 16384 kbps 65536 bytes 65536 bytes o so ada Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 24 IPQoS Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This displays the index number of configured IPQoS profile s Name This displays the name of configured IPQoS profile s Select Select this next to an entry or entires that you want to edit or delete Modify Click this to edit the selected profile Delete Click this to remove the selected profile Name Type a name to identify the IPQoS profile you cannot change the name of the DEFVAL profile You can use up to 31 Engl
146. d Pie scr cin 162 Figure DERSTP SUE met 163 Fide o STE SA meee ee rene nen ere trp tren ton toad epe tren rer rer rere Tey por M api er Trey 165 mE RADIUS SaNaT WP EUER 167 Fote FADS ria 168 aol a p due E E EE 169 meli eO Fon Secu aia 171 Foura o0 eni uti 172 Figure 91 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID Sub option Format oooonccccnnncccnnccccnoncnnnnnaccconnnnnnnc cc nn nn anna cnn 174 Figure 92 DHCP Relay Agent Remote ID Sub option Format ooonccccinncccinncccnnocccnonccononcncnnnnccnnnnnnanannccnn 174 E A E IY 175 Foue DE PP SIDO iaa 177 Figure 35 DHCP Sad AAS Et 178 Figure Jo DACP COUET a aa Ee utu a a Aa 179 Foue d 2084 Routed Modo EXSIDIO uisi isst ud bet pec ana p pev aint DE Ord un emia dest p pda itd aga ae 182 gps dpi e tia 183 FIS 992634 Routed DOITIBII uiii ud cen iocadcisbn adus c clade cbr cula Fas raa Eit EEA OE EAEE EUREN aa MR 184 gums Ded lg 185 Figure 104 2054 Routed Gately cecus sad C E Reb ce D ada 186 Figure 102 Mixed PPPoA to PPPoE Broadband Network Example eene 189 Figure 103 PRESA TO PRPOE e 190 Figure 108 PPPOA TO PPPOE SIRIUS aso nds 192 PIQUE TUS DSEP Spi oos esi Per teree rere irene a 195 Powe TORIO MaD a A A A MM 196 Figure 107 Transparent LAN Service Network Example oooococonncccnnncccnconcconncnccnconccnnnnnnnnnnn cn naar cnn 198 Pigi TOS TES ni 198 gu J09 TES ER source tai 200 Fu TDi 204 Fit MIDI le ra 205 iue A cdetuctnd a D UU aM e anf
147. d to the DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Primary Server IP Enter the IP address of one DHCP server to which the switch should relay DHCP requests for the selected VLAN Secondary Server Enter the IP address of a second DHCP server to which the switch should relay IP DHCP requests for the selected VLAN Enter 0 0 0 0 if there is only one DHCP relay for the selected VLAN Relay Mode Specify how the IP DSLAM relays DHCP requests for the selected VLAN Auto The IP DSLAM routes DHCP requests to the active server for the VLAN Both The IP DSLAM routes DHCP requests to the primary and secondary server for the VLAN regardless of which one is active Option Mode Specify the type of format Private or TR101 the IP DSLAM uses when editing DHCP relay agent information to DHCP requests See Section 29 2 on page 173 Active Server This field has no effect if the Relay Mode is Both If the Relay Mode is Auto select which DHCP server the primary one or the secondary one to which the IP DSLAM should relay DHCP requests for the selected VLAN VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 29 DHCP Relay Table 57 DHCP Relay continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatil
148. defined in RFC 2516 and has the following format for this feature Table 85 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Vendor specific Tag Format The Tag_Type is 0x0105 for vendor specific tags as defined in RFC 2516 The Tag_Len indicates the length of Value il and i2 The Value is the 32 bit number 0x00000DE9 which stands for the ADSL Forum IANA entry il and i2 are PPPoE intermediate agent sub options which contain additional information about the PPPoE client The IP DSLAM supports two formats for the PPPoE intermediate agent sub options private and TR 101 41 1 0 1 Private Format There are two types of sub option Agent Circuit ID Sub option and Agent Remote ID Sub option They have the following formats Table 86 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Vendor specific Tag Format Slot ID Port No 1 byte 1 byte Table 87 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Remote ID Sub option Format The IP DSLAM adds the slot ID of the PPPoE client the port number of the PPPoE client the VLAN ID on the PPPoE packet and any extra information for example the device name into the Agent Circuit ID Sub option In addition the IP DSLAM puts the PPPoE client s MAC address into the Agent Remote ID Sub option The slot ID is zero if this value is not applicable If the IP DSLAM adds extra information it does not append a trailing 0x00 00h VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 225 Chapter 41 PPPoE Intermediate Agent 41 1 0 2 TR 101 Format The PP
149. displays the number of the xDSL port on which the PVC is configured VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 34 TLS PVC Table 70 TLS PVC continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VPI VCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to frames received on this channel Priority This is the priority value 0 to 7 added to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag IPQos Profile This field displays the IPQoS profile applied for the TLS PVC Encap This field displays the encapsulation method lle or vc configured for the TLS PVC Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to Delete remove the entry Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 34 TLS PVC VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Double Tagging DT This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN double tagging on the IP DSLAM 35 1 Double Tagging Overview BS With Double Tagging DT enabled the IP DSLAM can add two tags C tag and S tag of the VLAN ID and priority level for untagged packets received from a private network to those used in the service provider s network When you enable DT on a port the port is called a DT access port Th
150. dress and the IP DSLAM s MAC address as the destination source MAC address For downstream traffic When the IP DSLAM sees the destination IP address is specified in the RPVC or RPVC domain the IP DSLAM will strip out the MAC header and send them to the corresponding RPVC 31 1 1 2684 Routed Mode Example The following figure shows an example 2684 routed mode set up The gateway server uses IP address 192 168 10 102 and is in VLAN 1 The IP DSLAM uses IP address 192 168 10 101 The subscriber s device the CPE is connected to DSL port 1 on the IP DSLAM and the 2684 routed mode traffic is to use the PVC identified by VPI 8 and VCI 35 The CPE device s WAN IP address is 192 168 10 200 The routed domain is the LAN IP addresses behind the CPE device The CPE device s LAN IP address is 10 10 10 10 and the LAN computer s IP address is 10 10 10 1 This includes the CPE device s LAN IP addresses and the IP addresses of the LAN computers VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 31 2684 Routed Mode Figure 97 2684 Routed Mode Example IP 192 168 10 102 VLAN 1 LAN IP 10 10 10 10 JIP 10 10 10 1 Note the following The CPE device s WAN IP 192 168 10 200 in this example must be in the same subnet as the gateway s IP address 192 168 10 102 in this example The IP DSLAM s management IP address can be any IP address it doesn t have any relationship to the WAN IP address or routed gateway IP address The IP DSLAM s management
151. e 5 1 Power Connections Overview Use the following procedures to connect the IP DSLAM to a power source after you have installed it in a rack BS Check the power supply requirements in Chapter 54 on page 283 and make sure you are using an appropriate power source 5 2 Power Connections The IP DSLAM power connections are at the left side of the front panel Use the included power cord to connect the AC power module to the outlet of a compatible power supply Turn on the power supply to turn on the IP DSLAM VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 55 Chapter 5 Power Connections VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Fan Maintenance This chapter describes how to change a fan module 6 1 Fan Maintenance Introduction The IP DSLAM has a hot swappable fan module Use the following procedures to remove the fan module Replace the entire fan module Return any malfunctioning fan modules to the manufacturer 6 2 Removing and Installing the Fan Module The IP DSLAM fan module is at the left on the front panel Perform the following procedure to remove the fan module 1 2 3 4 5 Loosen the thumbscrew on the front of the fan module Slide out the fan module Use a different fan module from the manufacturer Slide the fan module into the fan module slot Tighten the thumbscrew Figure 18 Fan Module Thumbscrews ZyXEL mn NA VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 6 Fan Maintenance Figure 19 Remov
152. e continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Media This field displays the type of media that this Ethernet port is using for a connection copper or fiber displays when the port is disabled or not connected Duplex This field displays whether the port is using half or full duplex communication displays when the port is disabled or not connected Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port s connection has been up displays when the port is disabled or not connected The following fields are related to the VDSL ports xDSL This identifies the VDSL port Click a port number to display that port s statistics screen The VDSL Port Statistics Screen appears See Section 9 1 2 on page Tf Status This field shows whether the port is connected Up or not Down Mode This field shows which VDSL operational mode the port is set to use displays when the port is not connected Up Down stream This field shows the number of kilobits per second that a port is set to transmit and receive displays when the port is not connected Interleave Fast This field shows the port s VDSL latency mode Fast or Interleave displays when the port is not connected Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port s connection has been up displays when the port is not connected The fo
153. e memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Server List This section lists the current DHCP relay settings for each VLAN An asterisk in parentheses indicates which DHCP server is active for each VLAN VID This field displays the ID of the VLAN served by the specified DHCP relay s Active This field displays whether or not the IP DSLAM relays DHCP requests in the selected VLAN to a DHCP server and the server s responses back to the clients Primary Server IP This field displays the IP address of one DHCP server to which the switch should relay DHCP requests If this is the active server for the selected VLAN it is marked with an asterisk Secondary Server IP This field displays the IP address of a second DHCP server to which the switch should relay DHCP requests This field is 0 0 0 0 if the primary server is the only DHCP relay If this is the active server for the selected VLAN it is marked with an asterisk Relay Mode This field displays how the IP DSLAM relays DHCP requests for the selected VLAN Auto The IP DSLAM routes DHCP requests to the active server for the VLAN Both The IP DSLAM routes DHCP requests to the primary and secondary server for the VLAN regardless of which one is active Option Mode This field displays which format Private or TR101 the IP DSLAM uses to add DHCP relay agent information to DHCP requests O
154. e DHCP relay agent information feature adds an Agent Information field to the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client TCP IP configuration request frames that the IP DSLAM relays to a DHCP server The IP DSLAM supports two formats for the DHCP relay agent information Private and TR 101 29 2 1 TR 101 Format The Agent Information field that the IP DSLAM adds contains an Agent Circuit ID sub option that includes the system name or IP address slot ID port number VPI and VCI on which the TCP IP configuration request was received The following figure shows the format of the TR 101 Agent Circuit ID sub option The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub option The next field specifies the length of the field The hostname field displays the system name if it has been configured the extra information field A if the hostname was not configured or the IP address in dotted decimal notation w x y z if neither the system name nor the extra information field was been configured In either case the hostname is truncated to 23 characters and trailing spaces are discarded The hostname field is followed by a space the string atm and another space Then a 1 byte Slot ID field specifies the ingress slot number the IP DSLAM s slot ID is always 0 and a 1 byte Port No field specifies the ingress port number Next the VPI and VCI denote the virtual circuit that received the DHCP request message from the subsc
155. e IP DSLAM adds VLAN tags for untagged traffic but drops tagged traffic flowing through the DT access ports Double tagged or single tagged packets received on the DT access ports are dropped 35 2 Configuring DT Click Advanced Application gt DT to open this screen Use this screen to view the existing DT entries It s recommended that you add a new entry in this screen only when you want to translate untagged packets into double tagged ones before forwarding them VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 35 Double Tagging DT Figure 110 DT EX AP DT DT PVC Port 1 y S tag VID 0 1 4094 S tag Priority l 0 y C tag VID 1 4094 C tag Priority y DT Enable O Apply Cancel Port Enable S VID S Pri C VID C Pri Select 1 1 0 1 0 O 2 1 0 1 o 3 4 o 1 0 Li HE ad V o Sem Enable Disable Select All None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 71 DT LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to set up a DT PVC This field is read only once you click on a port number below S tag VID Enter the S tag VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 The S tag service tag is the outer tag in double tagging S tag Priority Enter the S tag priority level from O to 7 C tag VID Enter the C tag VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 The C tag customer tag is the inner tag in double tagging C tag Priority Enter the C tag priority le
156. e Password to confirm eee Name admin Enter the new password in the Password and Retype Password to confirm fields and click Modify Do not forget to click Config Save before you exit the web configurator See Section 7 6 on page 67 Privilege Select P Privilege high Enable Y Index 1 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 7 Introducing the Web Configurator 7 6 Saving Your Configuration BS Click Apply in a configuration screen when you are done modifying the settings in that screen to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the IP DSLAM s power is turned off Click Config Save in the navigation panel to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory refers to the IP DSLAM s storage that remains even if the IP DSLAM s power is turned off Use Config Save when you are done with a configuration session 7 7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click Logout in any screen to exit the web configurator You have to log in with your password again after you log out This is recommended after you finish a management session both for security reasons and so you do not lock out other device administrators Figure 25 Logout Thank you for using the Web Configurator Goodbye Microsoft Internet Explorer xj 1 The Web page you are viewing is trying to close the window Do you want to close this window
157. e based services used to modify parameter DPBOFMAX defined below VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 16 xDSL Port Setup Table 20 xDSL Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION FMIN This defines the minimum frequency from which the DPBO shall be applied FMAX This defines the maximum frequency at which DPBO may be applied Result Mask Click Show to display the PSD mask result based on what you configured on this screen RFI Custom Configure this section if you select custom in the RFI Band field above Index This field displays the index number of an entry Enable Select this to activate a custom RFI band Start Specify the frequency a custom RFI band starts End Specify the frequency a custom RFI band ends Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again 16 9 2 DPBO EPSD Custom Click the Custom button in the xDSL Port Setting screen to open this screen Your settings in this screen are one of the factors determining the PSD mask result Figure 51 DPBO EPSD Custom Port 2 01 16 17 32 Break Point Frequency kHz PSD Level 0 5dBm Hz 1 pf 4325 120 2 fe 1380 120 3 3 143125 Bo 4 2
158. e external alarm input stops thermalSensorFailure This trap is sent when the thermal sensor fails vdslPerfLofsThreshNotificatio The number of times a Loss Of Frame has occurred within 15 minutes n for the XTUC has reached the threshold vdslPerfLossThreshNotificati The number of times a Loss Of Signal has occurred within 15 minutes on for the XTUC has reached the threshold VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 221 Chapter 40 Access Control Table 81 SNMPv2 Traps continued TRAP NAME DESCRIPTION vdslPerfl prsThreshNotificatio n The number of times a Loss Of Power has occurred within 15 minutes for the XTUC has reached the threshold vdslPerfLolsThreshNotificatio n The number of times a Loss Of Link has occurred within 15 minutes for the XTUC has reached the threshold vdslPerfESsThreshNotificatio n The number of error seconds within 15 minutes for the XTUC has reached the threshold vdslPerfSESsThreshNotificati on The number of severely errored seconds within 15 minutes for the XTUC has reached the threshold vdslPerfUASsThreshNotificati on The number of Unavailable seconds within 15 minutes for the XTUC has reached the threshold sysMacAntiSpoofing The IP DSLAM has detected the same MAC address on more than one subscriber port alarmRisingThreshold RMON Remote Network Monitoring values have exceeded the pre defined thresholds You can use SNMP MIB Ma
159. e received noise power for each sub carrier Select linetssi to display the VDSL line TSSI parameters Select resultmask to see the line s PSD mask adjustment result according to your VDSL settings on the port Near Far End Show Graph When you select linehlog linegln or linesnr in the Items field you can select this and click Show Graph to additionally show DSL Sub Carrier statistics in a prompted graph Select Near End to see the upstream line statistics of the selected item Select Far End to see the downstream line statistics of the selected item VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide PART III Advanced Application VLAN 133 Protocol VLAN 139 IGMP 141 Static Multicast 151 Multicast VLAN 153 Packet Filtering 157 MAC Filter 159 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 161 Port Authentication 167 Port Security 171 DHCP Relay 173 DHCP Snoop 177 2684 Routed Mode 181 PPPoA to PPPoE 189 DSCP 195 TLS PVC 197 Double Tagging DT 203 ACL 207 Downstream Broadcast 213 Upstream Broadcast 215 LI Syslog 217 Access Control 219 PPPoE Intermediate Agent 225 MTU Size 229 UIFilter 231 NIMAC 233 Dot3ad 237 MAC Force Forwarding 241 VLAN This chapter shows you how to configure IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLANs 19 1 Introduction to VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple lo
160. e server with VLAN ID 0 is the default server Disable V Enable Active server VID Active Primary Server IP Secondary Server IP Relay Mode Option Mode Option82 Sub option1 r o i Select AN None Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 DHCP Relay 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Auto Private O LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN ID Enter the ID of the VLAN served by the specified DHCP relay s Enter O to set up the default DHCP relay s Enable DHCP Select this to have the IP DSLAM relay DHCP requests in the selected VLAN to Relay a DHCP server and the server s responses back to the clients Enable Option82 Select this to have the IP DSLAM add the originating port numbers to DHCP Sub option1 Circuit requests in the selected VLAN regardless of whether the DHCP relay is on or 1D off In the field next to the check box you can also specify up to 23 ASCII characters of additional information for the IP DSLAM to add to the DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Examples of information you could add would be the chassis number of the IP DSLAM or the ISP s name Enable Option82 Enable DHCP relay info to have the IP DSLAM add the sub option 2 Remote Sub option2 ID to DHCP requests in the selected VLAN regardless of whether the DHCP Remote ID relay is on or off In the field next to the check box you can also specify up to 23 ASCII characters of additional information for the IP DSLAM to ad
161. e solved by using this manual you should contact your vendor If you cannot contact your vendor then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device Regional offices are listed below see also http www zyxel com web contact us php Please have the following information ready when you contact an office Required Information 66 9 Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it 1s the prefix number you dial to make an international telephone call Corporate Headquarters Worldwide Support E mail support zyxel com tw Sales E mail sales zyxel com tw Telephone 886 3 578 3942 Fax 886 3 578 2439 Web www zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road IL Science Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan China ZyXEL Communications Beijing Corp Support E mail cso zycn Q zyxel cn Sales E mail sales 9 zyxel cn Telephone 86 010 82800646 Fax 86 010 82800587 Address 902 Unit B Horizon Building No 6 Zhichun Str Haidian District Beijing Web http www zyxel cn China ZyXEL Communications Shanghai Corp Support E mail cso zycn Q zyxel cn Sales E mail sales 9 zyxel cn Telephone 86 021 61199055 Fax 86 021 52069033 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 297 Appendix C Customer Support Address 1005F ShengGao International Tower No 137 XianX
162. e to manage the IP DSLAM Enable Select this check box to activate this secured client set Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it Start IP Address End IP Address Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage the IP DSLAM The IP DSLAM checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here The IP DSLAM immediately disconnects the session if it does not match Telnet FTP Web Select services that may be used for managing the IP DSLAM from the ICMP SNMP specified trusted computers Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide PPPoE Intermediate Agent This chapter describes how the IP DSLAM gives a PPPoE termination server additional information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client 41 1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Tag Format If the PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled the IP DSLAM adds a vendor specific tag to PADI PPPoE Active Discovery Initialization and PADR PPPoE Active Discovery Request packets from PPPoE clients This tag is
163. eam interface Figure 68 IGMP Proxy Network Example The IP DSLAM will not respond to IGMP join and leave messages on the upstream interface The IP DSLAM only responds to IGMP query messages on the upstream interface The IP DSLAM sends IGMP query messages to the hosts that are members of the query VLAN The IP DSLAM only sends an IGMP leave messages via the upstream interface when the last host leaves a multicast group In daisychain mode Ethernet interface 1 is set as the upstream interface and Ethernet interface 2 and the DSL ports are set as downstream interfaces 21 3 IGMP Status Screen Use this screen to view current IGMP information To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IGMP VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 21 IGMP Figure 69 IGMP Status aou Status Bandwidth Bandwidth Port Config Filter Port Group Portinfo Count Setup Query Report Leave Number of IGMP Groups Previous Reload Next Page 0 of 0 Index VID IP Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9110111 12 IENET 13 t4 1 16 17 18 19 20 2t 22 23 24 ENET o o0 0 o The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 IGMP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Clear Click Clear to delete the information the IP DSLAM has learned about multicast groups This resets every counter in this screen Query This is the total number of Query packets received Report This is the
164. eb Configurator SCreenS asian vod oca RC GP a 64 TeS ROME da dai 73 Tabe G Pot Slalieiles TEMG t T 75 Ns wa POSES VDSL TT 78 Tables ostia isaac date 82 lane A o 5 n bla va one Eze Ho 85 Tepic TU ESI ACES arre 87 Tal Ti hui T M 89 TS te Sw SUD iba pode pt n rq o Rennen Reb adr EM bota Re ei EM p ERAT LM RIS 92 NE cake gs E 95 THIS azdzHse paeem 97 deis 15 Opens bn PSD AA idus Gbta iss alvgadanianski vada Fd E KEuda 101 Table 16 VDSL2 Profiles In The Device viii ii dd 101 Table 17 Real Longth to Elecmical Lena aaa 103 Table 18 DSL Standards Maximum Transfer Rates ooooccccnnonoccccnononoonncnononannncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nanmanna nunne nnn 104 TAS TS RSL PON OED oiriin saseind aces daaatiaue a aa E AO Ee E ONS 105 Table 20 DSL Par SOTA adsorbed ebd aac ET nro a aont ua den cli 108 Table 21 DPBO EPODO CUASI aid id 112 TS 22 MO UU E 114 TREO SL Pori Rol aa ado 117 Tabla 22 IPIS PROBE paurna ord eek Pd dS nk Et Eri RER PEE RM REK Fed RUE EP MERE PED GURREK FUP I ERE ERPEY ARE EE C AREE UAR 120 Vee PARI EID ri 122 Table 2620S Line Rale TIPO asia ordina ata datu dana aad a 125 Tae 2 DS DS dad 127 Table 28 XDSL PEHOITIBPOR 2er ic di 128 Tee So or E ES MC coa 130 Brie RE sni P 135 TEIG T SIB VLAN SENMO ara a Pup Ra acd a mah iru ura t dna e 136 Tila LAN POr SEO Ai 137 Tale do PREU READ usa A 139 TOE OS HOME ESE rr ica 143 TOGS WMAP Bare o mete ec T 144 Tabie 26 Bandwidd POLES nan eii 145 Teles Wall AOI auna 146 Nie a IGMP d doce
165. ect a port for which you wish to view or configure settings This field is read only once you click on a port number below Super Channel The IP DSLAM forwards frames belonging to VLAN groups that are not assigned to specific channels to the super channel Enable the super channel option to have this channel forward frames belonging to multiple VLAN groups that are not assigned to other channels The super channel functions in the same way as the channel in a single channel environment VPI Type the Virtual Path Identifier for a channel on this port VCI Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for a channel on this port IPQos Profile Select an IPQoS profile to classify and prioritize application traffic You can configure IPQoS profiles in the Basic Settings gt xDSL Profile Setup gt IPQos Profile screen see Section 17 2 on page 119 Encap Select the encapsulation type Ilc or vc for this VC PVID Type a PVID Port VLAN ID to assign to untagged frames received on this channel Priority Use the drop down list box to select the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag An asterisk denotes a super channel Add Apply Click this to add or save channel settings on the selected port The name of the button depends on whether or not you have clicked on a VC number in the Index column This saves your changes to the IP DSLAM s volati
166. ect deny to prevent the administrator from accessing the IP DSLAM VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 12 User Account VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Switch Setup The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global device features 13 1 Switch Modes The IP DSLAM supports daisychain and aggregation switch modes 13 1 1 Daisychain Switch Mode Daisychain switch mode sets the IP DSLAM to use Ethernet port one ENET 1 as an uplink port to connect to the Ethernet backbone and Ethernet port two ENET 2 to connect to another daisychained or subtending IP DSLAM When you daisychain multiple IP DSLAM they must all be set to daisychain mode Daisychain switch mode with port isolation enabled blocks communications between subscriber ports on an individual IP DSLAM and between the subscribers of any daisychained IP DSLAM see Figure 40 on page 92 for an example Use the same port isolation setting on all IP DSLAM that you set up in a daisychain 13 1 2 Port Isolation with Daisychain Switch Mode Example In the example below the IP DSLAM 1 has its Ethernet port one ENET 1 connected to the Ethernet backbone switch 3 and it s Ethernet port two ENET2 connected to Ethernet port one ENET 1 of the daisychained IP DSLAM 2 With port isolation turned on communications between A and B must first go through another switch or router 3 in the figure A and B also cannot communicate with C without their comm
167. ects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 80 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 40 Access Control 40 3 1 Supported MIBs MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance The IP DSLAM supports the following MIBs VDSL Line MIB RFC 3728 MIB IL IF MIB and ADSL line MIB RFC 2662 SNMP MIB II RFC 1215 BRIDGE MIB FDB status RFC 3728 VDSL MIB The IP DSLAM can also respond with specific data from the DSLAM private MIBs dslam mib 40 3 2 SNMP Traps The IP DSLAM can send the following SNMP traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs XTUC refers to the downstream channel for traffic going from the IP DSLAM to the subscriber XTUR refers to the upstream channel for traffic coming from the subscriber to
168. ed Application TLS Figure 108 TLS QG hD TLS TLS PVC Port fi y VID o 1 4094 Priority o y TLS Enable O App Cancel Port Enable VID Priority Select 1 o oO 2 o C 3 0 o Enable Disable Select All None VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 34 TLS PVC The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 TLS LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to set up a TLS PVC This field is read only once you click on a port number below VID Type a VLAN ID to assign to frames received on this channel Note Make sure the VID is not already used for PPPoA to PPPoE conversions Priority Use the drop down list box to select the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag TLS Enable Select this to enable transparent LAN service on this port Apply Click this to add or save channel settings on the selected port This saves your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Port This field displays the number of the xDSL port on which the PVC is configured Enable This field displays V when TLS has been enabled on the
169. eld shows the number of bytes that have been received on this port VPI VCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI of channels on this port vdsl displays when a VDSL device connects to this port Tx Packets This field shows the number of packets transmitted on each channel Rx Packets This field shows the number of packets received on each channel Tx rate This field shows the number of bytes per second transmitted on each channel Rx rate This field shows the number of bytes per second received on each channel Errors This field shows the number of error packets on each channel Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may Set Interval change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt system statistic polling Port Select a port from the Port drop down list box and then click Clear Counter to Clear Counter erase the recorded statistical information for that port Reset Click this to set the Poll Interval s and Port fields to their default values and to refresh the screen VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 9 Home and Port Statistics Screens VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide System Information The System Information screen displays general device information such as firmware version number and hardware polling infor
170. elect normal to have the IP DSLAM send an SNMP trap if either one of the fans fails to function well Select two to have the IP DSLAM send an SNMP trap only when more than one of the fans fail Use this section below to configure the hardware monitor threshold settings New threshold Apply Configure new threshold settings in the fields below and click Apply to use them Index This field is a sequential value Temperature C Hi Use these fields to configure the highest temperature limit at each sensor Temperature C Lo Use these fields to configure the lowest temperature limit at each sensor Volt Hi Use these fields to configure the highest voltage limit at each sensor Volt Lo Use these fields to configure the lowest voltage limit at each sensor Fan Hi Use these fields to configure the highest RPM limit at each sensor Fan Low Use these fields to configure the lowest RPM limit at each sensor Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may Set Interval change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt statistic polling VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 10 System Information VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide General Setup The General Setup screen allows you to configure general device identification information It also allows y
171. er 26 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol You can not use the IP DSLAM as the RSTP root device 26 2 RSTP Status Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application RSTP Figure 84 RSTP Status ED RSP Status RSTP Status RSTP Config RSTP On Bridge Status Our bridge ID 8000 0018cbd1964e Designated root ID 8000 001 9chd1964e Topology change times 0 Time since change 0 00 06 Costto root 0 Root port ID 0x0000 Root max age second 20 Root hello time second 2 Root forward delay second 15 Max age second 20 Hello time second 2 Forward delay second 15 Port Status ENET1 ENET2 State forwarding Disabled PortID 0x8019 Path cost 4 Costto root 0 Designated bridge 8000 001 9cbd1964e Designated port 0x8019 E _ _ _ _JJJ JJJJJJJ J _ J JJJJ _ IE Poll Interval s ao Set Interval Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 RSTP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION RSTP This field displays On if RSTP is activated Otherwise it displays Off Bridge Status If STP is activated the following fields appear If STP is not activated Disabled appears Our bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same in Designated root ID if the IP DSLAM is the root switch Designated root ID This is the unique identifier for the root bridge consisting of b
172. er 45 Dot3ad The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 98 Dot3ad Status LABEL DESCRIPTION State This field displays the link aggregation mode configured for the Ethernet ports disable displays when you disable link aggregation on the IP DSLAM lacp displays when you use Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP to dynamically create and manage the trunk group static displays when you use static link aggregation for the trunk group Members This field displays the member port s in the trunk group Links This field displays the trunk member port s which has been added in the LACP group Syncs This field displays port s which have successfully negotiated with the port at the peer end in the LACP group Note This field only displays values if you enable LACP on the ports at the both peer ends VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide MAC Force Forwarding 46 1 Overview MAC force forwarding is a method used to separate subscribers for management purposes The IP DSLAM intercepts a subscriber s ARP Address Resolution Protocol requests and has the subscriber send traffic to a pre defined Access Router AR or Application Server AS The AR or AS routes or forwards subscriber traffic so the subscribers do not know the MAC addresses of servers on the network A network administrator can use the AR or AS to monitor and manage subscriber traffic This prevents attackers from getting MAC add
173. er Account LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Select this check box to turn on the administrator account Name Enter a user name for the administrator account Password Enter a password for the administrator account Retype Password to Re enter the administrator account s password to verify that you have entered it confirm correctly VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 12 User Account Table 10 User Account continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Privilege Select a privilege level to determine which screens the administrator can use There is a high medium or low privilege level for each command Select high to allow the administrator to use all commands including the lower privilege commands High privilege commands include things like creating administrator accounts restarting the system and resetting the factory defaults Select middle to allow the administrator to use middle or low privilege commands Select low to allow the administrator to use only low privilege commands Low privilege commands are read only Add Click Add to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again Index This field displays the n
174. er optic cables into the transceiver you may need to remove cable dust covers 4 Insert the transceiver into the IP DSLAM s SFP slot 5 Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place Figure 11 Transceiver Installation Figure 12 Installed Transceiver 3 3 2 Transceiver Removal Use the following steps to remove a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module from the IP DSLAM 1 Remove the fiber optic cables from the transceiver 2 Unlock the transceiver s latch latch styles vary 3 Pull the transceiver out of the slot 4 Putthe transceiver s dust cover on the transceiver Figure 13 Opening the Transceiver Latch VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 3 Front Panel Connections Figure 14 Removing the Transceiver 3 4 Console Port Connection For local management you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters VT100 terminal emulation e 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control Connect the mini RJ 11 male end of the console cable to the console port of the IP DSLAM Connect the female end to a serial port COMI COM2 or other COM port of your computer 3 5 ALARM Connection A closed circuit on the ALARM input pins indicates an alarm Pins 7 and 3 are alarm input one Pins 8 and 4 are alarm input two Pins 8 and 5 are alarm input 3 Pins 9 and 8 are alarm input 4 The IP DSLAM signals an alarm when it detects an alarm on the A
175. erent This causes crosstalk between the lines Enable UPBO Upstream Power Back Off to allow the device to adjust the transmit PSD of all lines based on a reference line length This mitigates the upstream crosstalk on shorter loops to longer loops It allows the IP DSLAM to provide better service in a network environment with telephone wiring of varying lengths An example is shown below Line 1 and Line 2 are in the same cable binder Crosstalk occurs when the signal flows and is near to CPE A s location Besides higher Line 1 PSD causes higher interference to the Line 2 CO receives signal with higher attenuation With UPBO enabled on the CPE A it decreases the PSD level and reduces the crosstalk impact on long loops Figure 45 UPBO Resolves Upstream Far End Crosstalk Nm EN Line2 600m Central Site CO CPE A Line1 150m Ex 16 4 8 DPBO VDSL signal may interfere with other services such as ISDN ADSL or ADSL2 provided by other devices on the same bundle of lines due to downstream far end crosstalk DPBO Downstream Power Back Off can reduce performance degradation by changing the PSD level on the VDSL device es at street cabinet level ISDN in Europe uses a frequency range of up to 80 kHz while ISDN in Japan uses a frequency range of up to 640 kHz ADSL utilizes the 1 1 MHz band Both ADSL2 and ADSL 2 utilize the 2 2 MHz band VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 16 xDSL Po
176. ernative Subnet Mask Notation suenermask RR T RARE BERR 255 255 255 0 24 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 25 1000 0000 128 255 255 255 192 26 1100 0000 192 255 255 255 224 27 1110 0000 224 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 29 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 46 4 MACFF ARP Proxy Screen Click Advanced Application gt MACFF Arp Proxy to open the screen Use this screen to configure an expiration time for configured Access Router AR and Application Server AS ARP table entries See Section 46 3 on page 243 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 46 MAC Force Forwarding Figure 137 MAC ARP Proxy Index au AJ TS ND MAC Force Forwarding MACFF ARP Proxy Aging time eo 10 10000 seconds Apply Setting AR AS IP VID MAC Flush The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 103 MAC ARP Proxy LABEL DESCRIPTION Aging time Enter a number of seconds 10 10000 to set how long the IP DSLAM keeps the MAC APP proxy table s entries of configured AR and AS devices if subscribers no longer query them within this time Enter 0 to disable the aging time Apply Setting Click Apply Setting to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non
177. erver Syslog Select this check box to have the system send this alarm to a syslog server Severity Select an alarm severity level critical major minor or info for this alarm Critical alarms are the most severe major alarms are the second most severe minor alarms are the third most severe and info alarms are the least severe Clearable Select this check box to allow administrators to use the management interface to remove an alarm report generated by this alarm event entry Select this check box to keep an alarm report generated by this alarm event in the system until the conditions that caused the alarm report are no longer present Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Close Click Close to exit the screen without saving your changes 48 6 Alarm Port Setup Screen Use this screen to set the alarm severity threshold for recording alarms on an individual port s The system reports an alarm on a port if the alarm has a severity equal to or higher than the port s threshold VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 48 Alarm To open this screen click Alarm Alarm Port Setup Figure 143 Alarm Port Setup amp Alarm Port Setup Port Severit
178. ervers support all protocols so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main differences between them are the time format When you select the Daytime RFC 867 format the IP DSLAM displays the day month year and time with no time zone adjustment When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None is the default value Enter the time manually Each time you turn on the device the time and date will be reset to 2000 1 1 0 0 Time Server IP Address Enter the IP address of your timeserver The device searches for the timeserver for up to 60 seconds Click Sync if you want to get the IP DSLAM time updated with the time server you specified immediately This field is available when you selected Daytime RFC 867 Time RFC 868 or NTP RFC 1305 in the Use Time Server When Bootup field Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu or refresh the menu New Time hh mm ss Enter the new time in hour minute and second format The new time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu New Date yyyy mm dd Enter the new date in year month and day format The new date
179. es 39 197 down shift SNR 118 downstream broadcast 39 definition 104 impulse noise protection 126 interval delay 126 output power 126 Downstream Power Back Off see DPBO DPBO 102 electrical length 103 DSCP DSCP to IEEE 802 1p priority mapping 39 DSL profiles 99 DSL subscriber data ports 47 DSP Digital Signal Processor 82 Duplex 97 dust filter 41 cleaning 42 installation 42 magnets 41 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol see DHCP dynamic link aggregation 237 dynamic query VID table 147 E EAP 158 EAPOL 158 electrical length calculation 103 DPBO 103 DSL line cable type 103 Errored Seconds ES 128 Ethernet address 82 Ethernet port statistics 75 Extensible Authentication Protocol see EAP external syslog server 217 F factory defaults 261 fan introduction 36 maintenance 57 sensor 83 trap mode 83 Fan Module 57 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Index fan module 57 installing and removing 57 fan speed 83 far end actual aggregate transmit power LDM test parameter 267 ToneDiag parameter 267 Far End Block Errors FEBE 129 Far End Cyclic Redundancy Checks 129 fast channel 100 fast mode 100 118 FCC interference statement 293 FCS Frame Check Sequence 75 file transfer using FTP 262 firmware upgrade 259 firmware version 82 force authorized 802 1x 170 force unauthorized 802 1x 170 forwarding delay general rule 165 RSTP 165 Frame Check Sequence see FCS front panel o
180. esiding within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 212 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 133 Chapter 19 VLAN ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 See Chapter 54 on page 283 for the maximum number of VLANs the IP DSLAM can support TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 bits The IP DSLAM handles up to 4094 VLANs VIDs 1 4094 The device accepts incoming frames with VIDs 1 4094 19 2 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the device is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN unaware swi
181. evice s NetMask Enter the number of bits for the specified IP address s netmask from left to right This determines how many subscriber IP addresses should be included in this rule See Network Size and Notation on page 245 if you do not know how to set this Apply Click Apply to save the settings in this section The settings then display in the summary table at the bottom of the screen Clicking Apply saves your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh Index This field displays the index number of an entry VID This field displays the VLAN ID to which the rule is applied AR AS IP This field displays the IP address of an Access Router AR or Application Server AS The IP DSLAM replies to the subscriber ARP requests with this device s MAC address SRC IP This field displays the subscriber IP network of a rule Mask IP This field displays the netmask for the subscriber IP network Select Select this and click Delete to remove the setting Delete Click this to remove the selected setting s Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 46 MAC Force Forw
182. evices refer to the limit PSD mask to adjust its PSD level when transmitting data Select a PSD mask to specify the frequency distribution From the mask list you can also see the upstream and downstream bands For example select vdsl2 a nusO to use upstream band 0 and up to its gand sub carrier and downstream band 1 starting from the 3214 sub carrier Available options are listed as follows vdsl2 a nusO vdsl2 a eu32 vdsl2 a eu36 vdsl2 a eu40 vdsl2 a eu44 vdsl2 a eu48 vdsl2 a eu52 vdsl2 a eub56 vdsl2 a eu60 vdsl2 a eu64 vdsl2 a eu128 vdsl1 fttex ansi m1 vdsl1 fttex ansi m2 vdsli fttcab ansi m1 vdsl1 fttcab ansi m2 vdsli1 fttex ansi m1 e vdsli fttex ansi m2 e vdsl1 fttcab ansi m1 e vdsl1 fttcab ansi m2 e vdsl2 a ct vdsl2 b8 1 vdsl2 b8 2 vdsl2 b8 3 vdsl2 b8 4 vdsl2 b8 5 vdsl2 b8 6 vdsl2 b8 7 vdsl2 b8 8 vdsl2 b8 9 vdsl2 b8 10 vdsl2 b8 11 vdsl2 b8 12 vdsl2 b8 13 vdsl2 b8 14 vdsl2 b8 15 vdsl2 b8 16 vdsl2 b7 1 vdsl2 b7 2 vdsl2 b7 3 vdsl2 b7 4 vdsl2 b7 5 vdsl2 b7 6 vdsl2 b7 7 vdsl2 b7 8 vdsl2 b7 9 vdsl2 b7 10 vdsl2 bt anfp vdsl2 c 138 b vdsl2 c 276 b vdsl2 c 138 co vdsl2 c 276 co VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 16 xDSL Port Setup Table 20 xDSL Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Min INP Specify the level of impulse noise burst protection for a slow or interleaved channel related to upstream or downstream transmissions This
183. ex This is the index number of an entry Query VID This field displays a query VLAN which has manually added Select Delete Select an entry and click Delete to remove it from the table VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 21 IGMP Table 37 IGMP Config continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Dynamic Query VID This table lists the IGMP query VLANs that the system has dynamically learned Table via IGMP snooping or IGMP proxy These are VLANs on which the system sends IGMP query messages They are multicast service subscriber VLANs Index This is the index number of an entry Query VID This field displays a query VLAN which has dynamically learned 21 7 IGMP Filter Profile Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IGMP gt Filter You can use the IGMP filter profiles to control access to a service that uses a specific multicast group like a SIP server for example Configure an IGMP filter profile that allows access to that multicast group Then assign the IGMP filter profile to xDSL ports that are allowed to use the service The DEF VAL IGMP filter profile is assigned to all of the xDSL ports by default It allows a port to join all multicast IP addresses 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 If you want to allow a xDSL subscriber access to only specific IGMP multicast groups use the IGMP Filter Profile screen to configure a different profile and then assign it to the subscriber
184. f entries 48 5 Alarm Event Setup Screen This screen lists the alarms that the system can generate along with the severity levels of the alarms and where the system is to send them To open this screen click Alarm Alarm Event Setup VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 48 Alarm Figure 141 Alarm Event Setup D Alarm Event Setup Index Alarm Condition Code Condition Facility SNMP Syslog Severity Clearable 1 dsl 5000 line up locald Y v info Y a dsl 5001 line down local Y Y info Y 3 dsl 5002 vdsl tca lol locald Y v info v 4 dsl 5003 vdsl tca lof locald Y v info v 5 dsl 5004 vdsl tca los local Y v info Y 6 dsl 5005 wdsl tca lop local Y v info Y t dsl 5006 vdsl tca es locald v v info Y 8 dsl 5007 wdsl_tca_ses locald v v info v 3 dsl 5008 vdsl tca uas local Y v info Y 10 eqpt 10000 wol_err local Y Y critical 11 eqpt 10001 temp err local Y v critical 12 eget 10002 fan err local Y v critical 13 egpt 10003 hw rtc fail locald Y v critical 14 eqpt 10004 hw mon fail local Y v critical 15 eqpt 10005 cold start local Y v info 16 eqpt 10006 warm start locald v Y into AT eget 10007 slm input locald Y v critical 18 sys 15000 reboot local Y v info 18 sys 15001 aco locali v v info 20 sys 15002 alm clear local Y v info 21 sys 15003 login fail locald v v minor Y 22 sys 15004 anti_spoofing local Y v minor Y 23 enet 20000 up local Y v info 24 enet 20001 down locald v Y major Y The following table describes
185. f the device 47 FTP access control 223 uploading or downloading files 262 Full Duplex 97 fuse 291 rating 284 replacement 291 warning 284 G ground wire specification 283 grouping Ethernet ports 237 H hardware features 35 Hello Time RSTP 165 Home screen 73 hostname 85 humidity 284 ICMP access control 223 IEEE 802 1p 37 IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN 37 IEEE 802 1Q see tagged VLAN IEEE 802 1x 38 167 IEEE 802 3ad 237 238 IEEE802 1x 169 IGMP 141 158 count 37 modes 146 version 146 IGMP count 149 IGMP filter profiles 147 IGMP snooping 141 Impulse Noise Protection see INP Initial Configuration 69 INP 102 downstream 126 upsteam 126 install fuse 291 Installation Rack Mounted 44 installation requirements rack 43 installing the fan module 57 Interleave Delay 99 interleave delay 118 119 interleave mode 118 Internet Explorer 61 69 Internet Group Multicast Protocol 158 Internet Group Multicast Protocol see IGMP Internet Protocol 157 Internet Protocol Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer see IP DSLAM Internet Protocol television see IPTV IP 157 IP DSLAM 33 IP Setup 95 IPQOS profile 114 IPTV 149 ITU T 993 2 100 J jabber 76 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Index L LACP 237 latency mode 118 LDM test 263 LDM test parameter attainable net data rate 266 channel characteristics function 266 far end actual aggregate transmit power 267 line attenuat
186. filtering MAC Type a device s MAC address in hexadecimal notation xx xx xx xx xx xx where x is a number from 0 to 9 or a letter from a to f in this field The MAC address must be a valid MAC address VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 25 MAC Filter Table 47 MAC Filter continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Port These are the numbers of the xDSL ports Mode Select Accept to only allow frames from MAC addresses that you specify and block frames from other MAC addresses Select Deny to block frames from MAC addresses that you specify and allow frames from other MAC addresses Active Select this check box to turn on MAC filtering for a port MAC This field lists the MAC addresses that are set for this port Delete Click Delete to remove a MAC address from the list Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide
187. following table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 IGMP Config LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Mode Select Proxy to have the device use IGMP proxy Select Snooping to have the device passively learn multicast groups Select Disable to have the device not use either IGMP proxy or snooping IGMP Version Select which version of IGMP you want the device to support Select IGMPv2 V2 or IGMPv3 V3 If you select IGMPv2 the device discards IGMPv3 packets This provides better security if none of the devices in the network use IGMPv3 If you select IGMPv3 the device recognizes both IGMPv2 and IGMPv3 Apply Click Apply to save your IGMP mode settings Clicking Apply saves your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Add Static Query VLAN Type the number for an IGMP proxy VLAN and click Apply to add a static VLAN on which the system sends IGMP query messages This should be the number of a subscriber VLAN The VLAN will appear in the Static Query VID Table You must configure the system s VLAN settings before you can set static query VIDs Static Query VID Table This table lists the manually added VLANs on which the system sends IGMP query messages These are multicast service subscriber VLANs Ind
188. for a channel on this port VCI Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for a channel on this port IPQos Profile Select an IPQoS profile to classify and prioritize application traffic flowing through this TLS PVC Use the Basic Setting gt xDSL Profiles Setup gt IPQos Profile screen to configure IPQoS profiles See Section 17 2 on page 119 Encap Select an encapsulation method lle or vc for this TLS PVC VID Type a VLAN ID to assign to frames received on this channel Note Make sure the VID is not already used for PPPoA to PPPoE conversions Priority Use the drop down list box to select the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag Apply Click this to add or save channel settings on the selected port This saves your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Show Port Select which xDSL port s for which to display TLS PVC settings Index This field displays the number of the PVC Click a PVC s index number to use the top of the screen to edit the PVC Note At the time of writing you cannot edit the VPI and VCI If you want to change them add a new PVC with the desired settings Then you can delete any unwanted PVCs Port This field
189. g Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh This table displays the configured user profiles Index These are the numbers of the user profiles Click this number to edit the user profile Name This is the user name of the user profile Delete Select a user profile s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the user profile Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh and clear any selected Delete check boxes 27 3 802 1x Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x Figure 88 802 1x A 802 1x RADIUS 802 1x Enable Vv Apply Cancel Port Enable Control Reauthentication Reauthentication Period s 1 O AUTO y On 3600 50 65535 2 O AUTO hd n y 3600 60 65535 3 Oo AUTO y In y 5600 60 65535 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 802 1x LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Select this check box to turn on IEEE 802 1x authentication on the switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Port This field displays a port number Enable Select this
190. g table describes the labels in this screen Table 36 Bandwidth Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field shows each xDSL port number Active This field shows whether or not multicast bandwidth requirements are enabled on this port V displays if it is enabled and displays if it is disabled Bandwidth Enter the maximum acceptable multicast bandwidth for this port This has no effect if bandwidth requirements are disabled Select Select this and click Active or Inactive to enable or disable the specified multicast bandwidth requirements on this port Active Click this to enable the specified multicast bandwidth requirements on the selected port Inactive Click this to disable the specified multicast bandwidth requirements on the selected port Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 21 IGMP 21 6 Config Screen Use this screen to configure your IGMP settings To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IGMP gt Config Figure 72 IGMP Config Static Query VID Table Index Index CEN GMP g Status Bandwidth Bandwidth Port Config Filter Port Group Port Info Count Setup IGMP Mode Disable IGMP Version v2 y Add Static Query VLAN Dynamic Query VID Table Any p amo Query VID Select _Datete Query VID The
191. gent information 40 PADI 192 PADO 193 PADR 193 PADS 193 PADT 193 PPPoE Intermediate Agent 225 tag format 225 PPPoE intermediate agent TR 101 format 226 priority 37 114 165 190 191 priority queue assignment 93 private format 174 PRM threshold 83 product registration 295 profile alarm 99 VDSL 36 profiles DSL 99 PSD Power Spectral Density 100 punch down tool 54 PVC 112 PVID 114 134 190 191 PWRLED 275 PWR LED Does Not Turn On 275 Q Q in Q 197 query VLAN ID 146 quiet line noise LDM test parameter 267 ToneDiag parameter 268 R rack 19 inch 283 rack 482 6 mm 283 rack mounted installation requirements 43 Radio Frequency Interference see RFI VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Index RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service 167 RADIUS setup 168 rate limiting upstream broadcast traffic 39 215 reauthentication 170 reboot 261 rebooting system 261 Recovering the Firmware 282 reducing noise in xDSL transmissions 126 Reed Solomon 99 118 registration product 295 related documentation 3 remote management configuring secured clients 224 service port 223 remote service access control 219 223 removing fuses 291 removing the fan module 57 resetting 280 resetting the defaults 280 restart system 261 restoring configuration 260 Revolutions Per Minute see RPM RFC 2131 38 RFC 2132 38 RFC 2486 158 RFI 100 RJ 11 Connectors 54 RMON Remote Network Monitoring 222 RPM
192. gical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In MTU Multi Tenant Unit applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain Note that a VLAN is unidirectional it only governs outgoing traffic 19 2 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the device on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier r
193. gnments of the console cable Figure 158 Console Cable RJ 11 Male Connector 0000 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 287 Chapter 54 Product Specifications Figure 159 Console Cable DB 9 Female Connector 860000 98000 Table 133 Console Cable Connector Pin Assignments RJ 11 MALE DB 9 FEMALE Pin 2 TXD Pin 2 Pin 3 RXD Pin 3 Pin 4 GND Pin 5 54 4 ALARM Connector Pin Assignments The following diagram shows the alarm connector pin layout Figure 160 ALARM Connector Pin Layout Pin 5 Pin 9 Pin 1 Pin 6 Table 134 ALARM Connector Pin Assignments PIN DESCRIPTION to signal an alarm 1 2 6 Open the circuit of pins 1 and 6 and close the circuit of pins 2 and 6 3 7 Pins for alarm input 1 4 8 Pins for alarm input 2 5 8 Pins for alarm input 3 9 8 Pins for alarm input 4 gt Alarm input is only for dry contact without any power Open or short circuit is recommended 288 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide PART VI Appendices and Index Changing a Fuse 291 Legal Information 293 Customer Support 297 Index 303 Changing a Fuse This appendix shows you how to remove and install fuses for the IP DSLAM If you use a fuse other than an included fuse make sure it matches the fuse specifications in the chapter on product specifications Removing a Fuse gt gt Disconnect all power from the IP
194. gnostics This chapter explains the Diagnostic screens 50 1 Diagnostics Screen Use this screen to check system logs ping IP addresses or perform loopback tests To open this screen click Management Diagnostic Figure 150 Diagnostic 16 Diagnostic _ Syslog Event Log Display Clear IP Ping IP Address o 0 0 0 Ping _ Times 1 10 Loopback Test Pot i v vm o vcio _OAMFS5 Loopback LDM Test Pon i v SetLDM Port Get LDM Data raw SELT Pon i y Set SELT Port Get SELT Data VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 50 Diagnostics The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 111 Diagnostics LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Event Log Click Display to display a log of events in the multi line text box Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the log IP Ping Type the IP Address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection In the Times field specify how often you want to ping the IP address Select the Interface from which you want to ping the IP address Ethernet Click Ping to have the device ping the IP address in the field to the left Loopback Test Select a port number from the Port drop down list box and enter a VPI VCI to specify a PVC Click OAM F5 Loopback to perform an OAMF5 loopback test on the specified DSL port An Operational Administration and Maintenance Function 5 test is used to test the connection between two DSL devices
195. he IANA Click Advanced Application OUI Filter to display the following screen Figure 125 OUI Filter LUCA Accept Mode accept specified OUIs but deny others Deny Mode deny specified OUIs but accept others Port hi x OUI HE Add Cancel Port Mode Active oul Delete 1 Accept y O 2 Accept y O 3 Accept y O cur a ae eae Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 92 OUI Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Select a port for which you wish to configure packet type filtering OUI Enter the first three octets of a MAC address in the format xx xx xx For example 00 AF FF Add Click this to save the OUI to the specified port Cancel Click this to reset the OUI field VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 231 Chapter 43 OUI Filter Table 92 OUI Filter continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This displays the IP DSLAM s port number Mode Specify the action on matched frames Select Accept to allow frames with a matched OUI field in the MAC addresses The switch blocks frames with other OUIs not specified Select Deny to block frames with a matched OUI field in the MAC addresses The switch allows frames with other OUIs not specified Active Select this to activate this filter Clear this check box to disable the filter without deleting it OUI This displays the first three octets of a MAC address in the format xx xx xx Dele
196. he non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Index This field displays the number of the routed PVC Port This field displays the number of the xDSL port on which the routed PVC is configured VPI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port VCI This field displays the Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port IP This field displays the subscriber s IP address VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 31 2684 Routed Mode Table 61 2684 Routed PVC continued LABEL DESCRIPTION NetMask This field displays the bit number of the subnet mask of the subscriber s IP address IPQos Profile This field displays the IPQoS profile configured for this PVC Encap This field displays the encapsulation method lle or vc configured for this PVC Gateway IP This field displays the IP address of the gateway to which you want to send the traffic that the system receives from this PVC Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Clicking Delete saves your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click C
197. he same profile thus removing the need to configure the settings of each DSL port one by one You can also change an individual DSL port s settings by assigning it a different profile For example you could set up different profiles for different kinds of accounts for example economy standard and premium Assign the appropriate profile to a DSL port and it takes care of a large part of the port s configuration You still get to individually enable or disable each port as well as configure its channels and operational mode See the chapter on profiles for how to configure DSL profiles 16 2 Alarm Profiles Alarm profiles define DSL port alarm thresholds The system sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when the thresholds of the alarm profile are exceeded See the chapter on profiles for how to configure alarm profiles 16 3 Interleave Delay Interleave delay is the wait in milliseconds that determines the size of a single block of data to be interleaved assembled and then transmitted Interleave delay is used when transmission error correction Reed Solomon is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line The bigger the delay the bigger the data block size allowing better error correction to be performed Reed Solomon codes are block based error correcting codes with a wide range of applications The Reed Solomon encoder takes a block of digital data and adds extra redundant bits The Reed Solomon decoder processes
198. he screen VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 8 Initial Configuration Figure 29 VLAN Port Settings Static VLAN Setting VLAN Status Static VLAN Settings VLAN Port Setting VID Active Name Delete Yes DEFAULT O 6b Click Fixed on port 2 and click Apply Figure 30 VLAN Port Settings Active Vv Name px FAULT VLAN ID n 174094 Port Control Tagging Select All Select All Select an None ENET1 Fixed C Forbidden Tx Tagging ENET2 Fixed C Forbidden FT Tx Tagging 1 Fiver C Forbidden Tx Tagging 2 Fixed Forbidden Tx Tagging 3 Fixed idden Tx Tagging 4 Fixed C Forbidden I Tx Tagging 5 S C Forbidden j ee Ea Nay S S aX Nuus ati o aii Appy Cancel 7 Connect the subscriber s VDSL device modem or router to port 2 The device should be able to access your network or the Internet 8 Repeat steps 4 7 to set up more VDSL subscriber line services 9 Click Config Save Config Save The Config Save screen appears Figure 31 Config Save nk The Save process could take several minutes Save 10 Click Save The following screen should appear Figure 32 Configuration Save Successfully Microsoft Internet Exple x A Saved successfully You can now use the device with the other settings set to the defaults to provide service to VDSL subscribers See Chapter 54 on page 283 for information on other default settings VES 1624FT
199. her than the high threshold eqpt 10001 temp err critical The temperature Tn is higher than the high threshold or lower than the low threshold eqpt 10002 fan err critical The fan RPM n is over the high threshold or lower than the low threshold eqpt 10003 hw rtc fail critical The Real Time Chip diagnosis test failed eqpt 10004 hw mon fail critical The hardware monitor diagnosis test failed eqpt 10005 cold start info System cold start eqpt 10006 warm start info System warm start eqpt 10007 alm input critical There is an external alarm input Sys 15000 reboot info The system restarted sys 15001 aco info An administrator cutoff canceled an alarm sys 15002 alm_clear info An administrator cleared the alarms sys 15003 login_fail minor V Someone used the wrong name or password and failed to log in sys 15004 anti_spoofing minor V enet 20000 up info A Gigabit Ethernet interface is up enet 20001 down major V A Gigabit Ethernet interface is down 48 4 Alarm History Screen This screen displays the historical alarms stored in the system To open this screen click Alarm Alarm History VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 48 Alarm Figure 140 Alarm History Alarm History Alarm Status Alarm History Alarm Type All y Refresh Clear Condition No Alarm Severity Timestamp Source up 1 enet info 08 19 13 49 16 enet 1 up 2 enet info 08 19 13 49 34 enet
200. hernet port is set to Auto the IP DSLAM tries to make a fiber connection first and does not attempt to use the RJ 45 port if the fiber connection is successful Select 100 Copper if the Ethernet port has a 100 MB electrical connection Select 1000 Copper if the Ethernet port has a 1000 MB 1 gigabit electrical connection Select 1000 Fiber if the Ethernet port has a 1000 MB 1 gigabit fiber optic connection Duplex The IP DSLAM uses full duplex Ethernet connections Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 15 ENET Port Setup VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide xDSL Port Setup This chapter explains how to configure settings for profiles and individual DSL ports It also covers how to configure virtual channels and virtual channel profiles 16 1 DSL Profiles A DSL profile is a table that contains a list of pre configured DSL settings Each DSL port has one and only one profile assigned to it at any given time You can configure multiple profiles including profiles for troubleshooting Profiles allow you to configure DSL ports efficiently You can configure many DSL ports with t
201. iS ENERO Eo a a a 209 mo ET eB A salada na 210 Foure TEAC POS MER ee 212 Figure 115 Downstream Broadcast sai does olas 213 Figure 116 Upsiream Broadtasl FR 215 Pourra EEG US cer TUNE 217 FU 118 ARO Giga ee 219 Figure 119 SNMF Management Model ocio 220 FRA TA pU amer cr rH TD 222 BNET qui Mex cesi 223 Figure 122 Remote Management Secured Client Setup sssssseeenee 224 Figure 123 PPPOE Intermediate AQU ni la 226 rowa T24 MTU e 229 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 25 List of Figures gs 123 FEE sao A 231 A N amd casar co Dou bn aactda DON baia rasa cmd enl n dE dus xd a eine 233 Pioure 127 NIMAG em mm 234 Powa 122 NINAO e m E aes ee 234 Figure 129 Aggregation Example Physical Connections coooccinncccnnonicnnnncccnnnannnnancccnn cnn naar ca narnia 238 PIQUE 130 DO aO M 239 PONE 191 DOR aA a NS o o adds 239 Figure 182 MAC Force Foradada aia 241 Figure 133 MAC Force Forwarding Configuration Example 1 ssessssseeeneeennnenne 242 Figure 134 MAC Force Forwarding Configuration Example 2 sssssssseenne 243 Figure 135 MAC Force Forwarding Configuration Example 3 essere 243 Figure 136 MAG Farce Forwarding exar ta PG bcp a acad ead 244 garanti desde t mE 246 Figure TOS mane ROUINO eee mm 249 Foure TIA ASE SS ud Deal 251
202. ia Rd Shanghai Web http www zyxel cn Costa Rica Support E mail soporte zyxel co cr Sales E mail sales zyxel co cr Telephone 506 2017878 Fax 506 2015098 Web www zyxel co cr Regular Mail ZyXEL Costa Rica Plaza Roble Escaz Etapa El Patio Tercer Piso San Jos Costa Rica Czech Republic E mail info cz zyxel com Telephone 420 241 091 350 Fax 420 241 091 359 Web www zyxel cz Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o Modransk 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Cesk Republika Denmark Support E mail support zyxel dk Sales E mail sales zyxel dk Telephone 45 39 55 07 00 Fax 45 39 55 07 07 Web www zyxel dk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Columbusvej 2860 Soeborg Denmark Finland Support E mail support zyxel fi Sales E mail sales zyxel fi Telephone 358 9 4780 8411 Fax 358 9 4780 8448 Web www zyxel fi Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Oy Malminkaari 10 00700 Helsinki Finland France E mail info zyxel fr Telephone 33 4 72 52 97 97 Fax 33 4 72 52 19 20 Web www zyxel fr Regular Mail ZyXEL France 1 rue des Vergers Bat 1 C 69760 Limonest France VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Appendix C Customer Support Germany Support E mail support zyxel de Sales E mail sales zyxel de Telephone 49 2405 6909 69 Fax 49 2405 6909 99 Web www zyxel de Regular Mail ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH Adenauerstr 20 A2 D 52146
203. icast entries configured on the IP DSLAM Page X of X This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information Previous Click one of these buttons to show the previous next screen if all status Next information cannot be seen in one screen Reload Click this button to refresh the screen The first table displays the names of the fields The subsequent tables show the settings of the IGMP groups Index This is the static multicast group index number MAC Address This is the multicast MAC address VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 154 Chapter 22 Static Multicast Table 42 Static Multicast continued LABEL DESCRIPTION 1 24 These fields display the static multicast group membership status of the xDSL ports V displays for members and displays for non members Click an xDSL port s status to change it clicking a V changes it to and vise versa Join All Click Join All to make all of the xDSL ports members of the static multicast group Leave All Click Leave All to remove all of the xDSL ports from the static multicast group Delete Click Delete to remove a static multicast group Adding new entry Add Type a multicast MAC address in the field and click the Add button to create a new static multicast entry Multicast MAC addresses must be 01 00 5E xx xx xx where x is a don t care value For example 01 00 5E
204. ications Arte 21 5 planta 28033 Madrid Spain Sweden Support E mail support 2 zyxel se e Sales E mail sales zyxel se Telephone 46 31 744 7700 Fax 46 31 744 7701 Web www zyxel se Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Sj porten 4 41764 G teborg Sweden Taiwan e Support E mail supportOzyxel com tw Sales E mail sales zyxel com tw Telephone 886 2 27399889 Fax 886 2 27353220 Web http www zyxel com tw Address Room B 21F No 333 Sec 2 Dunhua S Rd Da an District Taipei Thailand Support E mail support zyxel co th e Sales E mail sales zyxel co th e Telephone 4 662 831 5315 Fax 4 662 831 5395 Web http www zyxel co th Regular Mail ZyXEL Thailand Co Ltd 1 1 Moo 2 Ratchaphruk Road Bangrak Noi Muang Nonthaburi 11000 Thailand VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Appendix C Customer Support Turkey Support E mail cso zyxel com tr Telephone 90 212 222 55 22 Fax 90 212 220 2526 Web http www zyxel com tr Address Kaptanpasa Mahallesi Piyalepasa Bulvari Ortadogu Plaza N 14 13 K 6 Okmeydani Sisli Istanbul Turkey Ukraine United Support E mail support ua zyxel com Sales E mail sales ua zyxel com Telephone 380 44 247 69 78 Fax 380 44 494 49 32 Web www ua zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Ukraine 13 Pimonenko Str Kiev 04050 Ukraine Kingdom Support E mail support zyxel co uk Sales E mail sales zyxel co uk Telepho
205. igured alarm profiles VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide E Chapter 17 xDSL Profiles Setup Figure 58 Alarm Profile a SEE xDSL Profile IPQos Profile Alarm Profile Name a Add Cancel Threshold 15 Min LOF 0 900 o 15 Min LOS 0 900 o 15 Min LOL 0 900 fo 15 Min LPR 0 900 o 15 Min ES 0 900 o 15 Min SESL 0 800 o 15 Min UASL 0 900 o Init Failure Trap O Alarm profiles with xDSL port mapping Please click the to map a xDSL port to a new alarm profile Index Name Modify Delete 1121 3 4 5186 HB 9 10 PUT 12 33 1 14 15 151 17148 19120 F21 1 22 23 E24 1 DEFVAL Modify Delete VI vVIVIV LVIvVIVIVIVIVIVIVIVI VEDVIVIVIVIMVIMIMVIV EMI The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Alarm Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field is read only if you click Modify to edit a port profile Type a name to identify the alarm profile you cannot change the name of the DEFVAL profile You can use up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are not allowed Add Click Add to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Threshold Specify limits for the individual performance counters The IP DSLAM sends an alarm trap and gener
206. ilding port s of the equipment or subassembly MUST NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring These interfaces are designed for use as intra building interfaces only Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR 1089 CORE Issue 4 and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring The intra building port s of the equipment is suitable for connection only to shielded intra building cabling grounded at both ends Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Safety Warnings VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview o 31 Introduce IP SLAM rra Pa dr ebbe Ubi eph DORADO eRe 33 ae ea ISLAM IND DOE ESOS 41 Font Fonc Conneccion S ee n 47 MDF CICS ria id 53 Fowo COMES uan Rn 55 Fan UCUNHLIDr e T 57 DS SEUNS in 59 ipie Fels Me Web Comu sn E 61 MAMI cr a Ads 69 Home a a Port Siallclios SONS ir 73 veto TOFU ST sas peccata tao a o ce anao n kat Ed mans iene 81 orbs EUNT ULU
207. ing of bridge priority Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may Set Interval change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt STP statistic polling 26 3 RSTP Config Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application RSTP RSTP Config VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 26 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 85 RSTP Config Q 2b AA RSTP Status RSTP Config Active Vv Bridge Priority 52768 0 65535 Hello Time 2 1 10 seconds MAX Age 20 6 40 seconds Forwarding Delay 15 4 30 seconds Port Active Priority 0 255 Path Cost 1 65535 ENET1 Vv 128 a ENET2 E 128 a Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 RSTP Config LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to turn on RSTP Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch The allowed range is 0 to 61440 The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay
208. ing the Fan Module Figure 20 Fan Module Removed VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide PART Il Basic Settings Introducing the Web Configurator 61 Initial Configuration 69 Home and Port Statistics Screens 73 System Information 81 General Setup 85 User Account 87 Switch Setup 91 IP Setup 95 ENET Port Setup 97 xDSL Port Setup 99 xDSL Profiles Setup 117 xDSL Line Data 125 Introducing the Web Configurator This chapter tells how to access and navigate the web configurator 7 1 Web Configurator Overview The web configurator allows you to use a web browser to manage the IP DSLAM 7 2 Screen Privilege Levels There is a high or low privilege level for each screen High privilege screens are only available to administrators with high privilege access High privilege screens include things like creating administrator accounts restarting the system saving changes to the nonvolatile memory and resetting to factory defaults Nonvolatile memory refers to the IP DSLAM s storage that remains even if the IP DSLAM s power is turned off Administrators with high privilege access can use all screens including the lower privilege screens Administrators with the low privilege level are restricted to using only low privilege screens Low privilege screens are read only 7 3 Accessing the Web Configurator Use Internet Explorer 6 and later versions with JavaScript enabled Use the following instructi
209. ing the channel characteristics function for this sub carrier li im The channel characteristics function is represented in linear format by a scale factor and a complex number This is the imaginary part of the complex number used in producing the channel characteristics function for this sub carrier log This is a format for providing channel characteristics It provides magnitude values in a logarithmic scale This can be used in analyzing the physical condition of the DSL line QLN The Quiet Line Noise for a DMT sub carrier is the rms root mean square level of the noise present on the line when no DSL signals are present It is measured in dBm Hz The QLN can be used in analyzing crosstalk SNR This is the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio in dB A DMT sub carrier s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power The SNR can be used in analyzing time dependent changes in crosstalk levels and line attenuation such as those caused by temperature variations and moisture 50 4 ToneDiag Parameters The following table lists the tone diagnostic parameters that display see the ITU T s G 992 3 for more information Table 115 ToneDiag Parameters LABEL DESCRIPTION number of Discrete Multi Tone DMT modulation divides up a line s bandwidth into sub subcarries carriers sub channels of 4 3125 KHz each This number indicates how many upstream and downstream DMT
210. ion 266 quiet line noise 267 signal attenuation 266 signal to noise ratio 267 signal to noise ratio margin 266 LED DSL 277 limit PSD mask 100 limiting number of channels 149 line attenuation LDM test parameter 266 ToneDiag parameter 267 line statistics 129 link aggregation 237 238 ID information 238 LLC 113 loading factory defaults 261 location 85 log format 265 log messages 265 Login screen 62 loop test loopback test 263 264 MAC address 82 multicast 151 MAC address learning 92 MAC anti spoofing 93 MAC count filter 38 MAC Filter filtering MAC address 159 MAC filter 38 MAC force forwarding ARP proxy table 245 configuration 243 description 40 example 241 overview 241 setting examples 242 MAC spoofing 233 MAC table 269 MACFF see MAC force forwarding magnets dust filter 41 Main Distribution Frame 53 main screen of web configurator 62 maintenance 259 management 40 Management Information Base see MIB managing downtream broadcast packets 213 managing upstream broadcast packets 215 managing user accounts 87 maximum age RSTP 165 Maximum Receive Unit see MRU MDF 53 MDF Connections 53 Media Access Control see MAC address metric 250 MIB 220 Mini POP 34 model name of this device 85 mounting brackets 44 MRU 76 MTU Maximum Transmission Unit 229 multicast group learning automatically 141 IGMP Snooping 141 multicast MAC address 151 format 152 multicast statistics leave pac
211. is screen to configure the DHCP relay settings DHCP Snoop Use these screens to drop traffic from IP addresses not assigned by the DHCP server and to look at a summary of the DHCP packets on each port 2684 Routed Mode Use this screen to configure the IP DSLAM to handle 2684 routed mode traffic PPPoA to PPPoE Use this screen to enable PPPoA to PPPoE conversions on each port DSCP Use this screen to set up DSCP on each port and to convert DSCP values to IEEE 802 1p values TLS Use this screen to set up Transparent LAN Service VLAN stacking Q in Q on each port VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 7 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 4 Web Configurator Screens continued LABEL DESCRIPTION DT Use this screen to configure the VLAN double tagging feature ACL Use this screen to set up Access Control Logic profiles and to assign them to each PVC Downstream Use this screen to block downstream broadcast packets from being sent to Broadcast specified VLANs on specified ports Upstream Use this screen to configure the bandwidth for upstream broadcast packets Broadcast SysLog Use this screen to configure the syslog settings Access Control Use this screen to configure service access control and configure SNMP and remote management PPPoE Use this screen to insert line information into client PPPoE Discover Intermediate Agent Initialization
212. is section describes the ports on the IP DSLAM 1000 100 Mbps Ethernet Ports The IP DSLAM has two 1000 100Mbps auto sensing Ethernet ports They allow you to Connect the IP DSLAM to a second level IP DSLAM Daisy chain other IP DSLAM SFP Slots Install SFP Small Form factor Pluggable transceivers in these slots to connect to other IP DSLAMs at longer distances than the Ethernet port Stacking Daisy chain up to three IP DSLAM or other Ethernet devices Integrated Splitters The integrated DSL splitter eliminates the need to use external splitters that separate the voice band and VDSL signals Console Port Use the console port for local management of the IP DSLAM VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 35 Chapter 1 Introducing the IP DSLAM Fans The fans cool the IP DSLAM sufficiently to allow reliable operation of the IP DSLAM in even poorly ventilated rooms or basements To conserve energy and reduce noise the fan speed depends on the temperature Alarm LED An ALM alarm LED lights when the IP DSLAM is overheated the fans are not working properly the voltage readings are outside the tolerance levels or an alarm has been detected on the ALARM input pins Outband Management Interface The IP DSLAM has one 10 100 auto sensing UTP unshielded twisted pair port for outband Ethernet Manament 1 4 Software Features This section describes the general software features of the IP DSLAM System Monitoring Sys
213. isable the specified IGMP count limit on this port Active Click this to enable the specified IGMP count limits on the selected ports Inactive Click this to disable the specified IGMP count limits on the selected ports Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Static Multicast This chapter describes the Static Multicast screen 22 1 Static Multicast Use static multicast to allow incoming frames based on multicast MAC address es that you specify This feature can be used in conjunction with IGMP snooping proxy to allow multicast MAC address es that are not learned by IGMP snooping or IGMP proxy Use static multicast to pass routing protocols such as RIP and OSPF 22 2 Static Multicast Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Figure 77 Static Multicast Index 1 2 3 13 14 15 VID a Static Multicast The Number Of Static Multicast 0 Page 1 of 1 Previous Reload Next Adding new entry vip o mac E Ada To join leave a multicast group click the port status MAC Address 4 5 6 7 8 9 AGS At 12 1B 347 18 148 20 21 22 23 24 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Static Multicast LABEL DESCRIPTION The Number of Static Multicast This is the number of static mult
214. ish keyboard characters spaces are not allowed VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 17 xDSL Profiles Setup Table 24 IPQoS Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Number of Select the number of queues used to classify traffic You can select 1 2 4 or 8 Queues queues in an IPQoS profile depending on the number of applications you want to classify Note It s highly recommended to use 8 queues for traffic classifica tion Queue ld This is the index number of queues listed in the following table according to what you selected in the Number of Queues field PIR PIR is Peak Information Rate Enter the maximum data rate 128 32768 kbps allowed to flow through this device at peak hour You must enter the number which is a multiple of 64 See Section 17 2 on page 119 for more information CIR CIR is Committed Information Rate Enter the maximum data rate 64 16384 kbps guaranteed to flow through this device all the time You must enter the num ber which is a multiple of 64 See Section 17 2 on page 119 for more information Note CIR PIR lt two times of CIR in a queue For example CIR is 1024 you must enter the PIR in the same queue equal or less than 2048 2 x 1024 PBS PBS is Peak Burst Size Enter the maximum packet size 3072 65536 bytes allowed to flow through this device at peak hour You must enter the number which is a multiple of 256 See Section 17 2 on page 119 for more information
215. ity numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and default value is 128 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 26 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Table 51 RSTP Config continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is assigned according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Port Authentication This chapter describes the 802 1x authentication method and RADIUS server connection setup 27 1 Introduction to Authentication IEEE 802 1x is an extended authentication protocol that allows support of RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile management on a network RADIUS server 27 1 1 RADIUS RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service authentication is a popular protocol used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the de
216. k mounted on a standard EIA rack Use the rubber feet in a desktop installation and the brackets in a rack mounted installation For proper ventilation allow at least 4 inches 10 cm of clearance at the left and right of the IP DSLAM This is especially important for enclosed rack installations 2 3 1 Desktop Installation Procedure 1 Make sure the IP DSLAM is clean and dry VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation 2 Setthe IP DSLAM on a smooth level surface strong enough to support the weight of the IP DSLAM and the connected cables Make sure there is a power outlet nearby 3 Make sure there is enough clearance around the IP DSLAM to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the power cord 4 Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet 5 Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the IP DSLAM These rubber feet help protect the IP DSLAM from shock or vibration and ensure space between IP DSLAM when stacking Figure 6 Attaching Rubber Feet Dp Ei D gt Do not block the ventilation holes Leave space between IP DSLAMs when stacking 2 3 2 Rack Mounted Installation 2 3 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements The IP DSLAM can be mounted on an EIA standard size 19 inch rack or in a wiring closet with other equipment Follow the steps below to mount your IP DSLAM on a standard EIA rack using a rack mounting kit D gt Make sure the rack will safely su
217. ket Flush Click Flush to remove all of the entries from the DHCP snooping table for the selected port s 30 4 DHCP Counter Screen Use this screen to look at a summary of the DHCP packets on each port To open this screen click Advanced Application gt DHCP Snoop gt DHCP Counter Figure 96 DHCP Counter D DHCP Counter d DHCP Snoop DHCP Snoop Status DHCP Counter Show Port All y Port Discover Offer Request Ack Overflow 1 0 0 D D 2 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 DHCP Counter LABEL DESCRIPTION Show Port Select a port for which you wish to view information Port This field displays the selected xDSL port number s Discover This field displays the number of DHCP Discover packets on this port Offer This field displays the number of DHCP Offer packets on this port Request This field displays the number of DHCP Request packets on this port Ack This field displays the number of DHCP Acknowledge packets on this port VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 30 DHCP Snoop Table 60 DHCP Counter continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Overflow There is a limit to the number of IP addresses the DHCP server can assign at one time to each port This field displays the number of requests from DHCP clients above this limit Overflow requests are dropped by the IP DSLAM Clear Click Clear to delete the inf
218. kets 143 query packets 143 report packets 143 multicast VLAN see MVLAN multicast VLAN See MVLAN multiple to one MAC address conversion see NTMAC MVLAN 38 153 N N1MAC 233 advantage 233 Near End Block Errors NEBE 129 Near End Cyclic Redundancy Checks 129 NetBIOS 158 Network Basic Input Output System see NetBIOS NTP RFC 1305 86 number of Errored Seconds ES 128 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Index number of Far End Block Errors FEBE 129 number of IGMP groups 143 number of Near End Block Errors NEBE 129 number of Severely Errored Seconds SES 128 number of UnAvailable Seconds UAS 128 O OAM F5 loopback 264 operating environment 284 Option 82 39 173 OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier 231 OUI filtering 231 condition 231 oversize 76 P packet filter 157 PADI 192 PADO 193 PADR 193 PADS 193 PADT 193 PAE 39 password changing 66 path cost 166 permanent virtual circuit 112 Philips Screwdriver 2 44 physical specifications 283 Ping 264 ping test 263 Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet see PPPoE port blocking communication 92 grouping 237 IGMP packet counts 149 isolation 92 limiting number of IGMP groups 149 trunking 237 port security 171 Port Setup 97 port setup 97 port up time 74 port VLAN ID 134 port VLAN ID see PVID port based authentication 38 ports CO 1 24 47 USER 1 24 47 power connections 55 PPPoA to PPPoE PVC 39 PPPoE 157 intermediate a
219. l to noise margin 0 31 dB Configure the minimum downstream signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the maximum downstream signal to noise margin Target SNR Type the target downstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Configure the target downstream signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the minimum downstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum downstream signal to noise margin Up Shift SNR The downstream up shift signal to noise margin 0 31 dB When the channel s signal to noise margin goes above this number the device can attempt to use a higher transfer rate Configure the downstream up shift signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the target downstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum downstream signal to noise margin Down Shift SNR The downstream down shift signal to noise margin 0 31 dB When the channel s signal to noise margin goes below this number the device shifts to a lower transfer rate Configure the downstream down shift signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the target downstream signal to noise margin and greater than or equal to the minimum downstream signal to noise margin Add Click Add to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to
220. laysia North America Support E mail support zyxel com Support Telephone 1 800 978 7222 Sales E mail sales zyxel com Sales Telephone 1 714 632 0882 Fax 1 714 632 0858 Web www zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Inc 1130 N Miller St Anaheim CA 92806 2001 U S A Norway Support E mail support zyxel no Sales E mail sales zyxel no Telephone 47 22 80 61 80 Fax 47 22 80 61 81 Web www zyxel no Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Nils Hansens vei 13 0667 Oslo Norway Poland E mail info pl zyxel com Telephone 48 22 333 8250 Fax 48 22 333 8251 Web www pl zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications ul Okrzei 1A 03 715 Warszawa Poland Russia Support http zyxel ru support Sales E mail sales zyxel ru Telephone 7 095 542 89 29 Fax 7 095 542 89 25 Web www zyxel ru Regular Mail ZyXEL Russia Ostrovityanova 37a Str Moscow 117279 Russia VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Appendix C Customer Support Singapore e Support E mail support zyxel com sg Sales E mail sales zyxel com sg Telephone 65 6899 6678 Fax 65 6899 8887 Web http www zyxel com sg Regular Mail ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd No 2 International Business Park The Strategy 3103 28 Singapore 609930 Support E mail support zyxel es e Sales E mail sales zyxel es Telephone 34 902 195 420 Fax 34 913 005 345 Web www zyxel es Regular Mail ZyXEL Commun
221. ld 82 VPI Virtual Path Identifier 79 W warning fuse 284 warranty 294 note 295 web access control 223 web configurator logging out 67 web configurator s main screen 62 wire gauge 283 X xDSL bandwidth divided 126 line details 126 line performance 127 xDSL Termination Unit Central see XTUC xDSL Termination Unit Remote see XTUR xDSL vendor info 126 XMODEM upload 281 282 XTUC 221 XTUR 221 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Index VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide EI Index 312 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide
222. le memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Show Port Select the number of an DSL port for which to display VC settings or display all of them Index This field displays the number of the VC Click a VC s index number to use the top of the screen to edit the VC Note At the time of writing you cannot edit the VPI and VCI If you want to change them add a new VC with the desired settings Then you can delete any unwanted VCs Port This field displays the number of the DSL port on which the VC is configured VPI VCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port IPQos Profile This filed displays an IPQoS profile applied on a port using this VC PVID This is the PVID Port VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this channel An asterisk denotes a super channel Priority This is the priority value 0 to 7 added to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag An asterisk denotes a super channel Encap This field displays the encapsulation type lle or vc configured on a port for the VC VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 16 xDSL Port Setup Table 22
223. led Permanent Virtual Circuits or PV Cs allows you to set priorities for different services or subscribers You can define up to eight channels on each DSL port and use them for different services or levels of service You set the PVID that is assigned to untagged frames received on each channel You also set an IEEE 802 1p priority for each of the PVIDs In this way you can assign different priorities to different channels and consequently the services that get carried on them or the subscribers that use them For example you want to give high priority to voice service on one of the DSL ports Use the Edit Static VLAN screen to configure a static VLAN on the IP DSLAM for voice on the port Use the DSL Edit Port Channel Setup screen to Configure a channel on the port for voice service Set the channel to use the PVID of the static VLAN you configured Assign the channel a high priority Super Channel The IP DSLAM forwards frames belonging to VLAN groups that are not assigned to specific channels to the super channel Enable the super channel option to allow a channel forward frames belonging to multiple VLAN groups that are not assigned to other channels The super channel functions in the same way as the channel in a single channel environment One port can have only one super channel KL VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 16 xDSL Port Setup 16 10 2 LLC LLC is a type of encapsulation where one VC Virtual Ci
224. lick on a submenu link to open the screen in the main window See Section 7 4 on page 63 for more information B Click this to open the Home screen This is the same screen that is displayed above See Chapter 9 on page 73 for more information C Click this to log out of the web configurator VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 7 Introducing the Web Configurator 7 4 Navigation Panel In the navigation panel click a menu item to reveal a list of submenu links Click a submenu link to go to the corresponding screen Table 3 Navigation Panel Submenu Links BASIC SETTING ADVANCED APPLICATION ROUTING PROTOCOL ALARM MANAGEMENT CONFIG SAVE VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 7 Introducing the Web Configurator The following table briefly describes the functions of the screens that you open by clicking the navigation panel s sub links Table 4 Web Configurator Screens LABEL DESCRIPTION Basic Setting System Information Use this screen to display general system and hardware monitoring information General Setup Use this screen to configure general identification information about the device and the time and date settings User Account Use this screen to configure system administrator accounts Switch Setup Use this screen to set up system wide parameters such as MAC address learning and priority queues IP Setup Use this screen
225. llowing fields and buttons apply to the whole screen Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may Clear Counter Set Interval change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt system statistic polling Port Select a port from the Port drop down list box and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port Reset Click this to set the Poll Interval s and Port fields to their default values and to refresh the screen 9 1 1 Ethernet Port Statistics Screen Use this screen to display statistics about an Ethernet port To open this screen click an Ethernet port s number in the Home screen VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 9 Home and Port Statistics Screens Figure 34 Port Statistics Ethernet Port Statistics Port ENET1 y Port Name Rx bytes Rx error fcs Rx broadcast Rx fragments Rx error mru Rx jabber Rx oversize Rx discard Tx bytes Tx multicast Txmac pause Txframes Tx undersize Tx oversize packet lt 64 packet 1 28 255 packet 512 1023 packet 1522 packetitotal multicast total Poll Interval s Port A Fort Statistics ha 7 Up RMON enetl 15129217 Rx packets 128224 5 Rx multicast 8687 72124 Rx mac pause 1 4 Rx error overrun 0 Rx dropped 11 1 Rx error alignment 5 0 Rx undersize 3 1
226. m This chapter shows you how to display the alarms sets the severity level of an alarm s and where the system is to send the alarm s and set port alarm severity level threshold settings 48 1 Alarm The IP DSLAM monitors for equipment DSL and system alarms and can report them via SNMP or syslog You can specify the severity level of an alarm s and where the system is to send the alarm s You can also set the alarm severity threshold for recording alarms on an individual port s The system reports an alarm on a port if the alarm has a severity equal to or higher than the port s threshold 48 2 Alarm Status Screen This screen displays the alarms that are currently in the system To open this screen click Alarm gt Alarm Status Figure 139 Alarm Status a ORME Alarm Status Alarm History Alarm Type aii y Refresh Clear Condition p No Alarm Severity Timestamp Source fi 1 eqpt MEDIE critical 08 22 11 51 53 eqpt 1 fan err 2 pk cm critical 08 22 11 51 53 eqpt3 fan_err 3 eqpt e critical 08 22 11 51 53 eqpt 2 down 4 enet major 08 22 11 52 15 enet 2 Page 1of 1 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 251 Chapter 48 Alarm The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 105 Alarm Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Alarm Type Select which type of alarms to display by Severity or select All to look at all the alarms Refresh Click this butt
227. m 42 29 2 Mate Mounted PSA visir ida 43 Chapter 3 Front Panel Connections aaa 47 oT PIODEP SH Ls sce che se oi eoim ote eto tome etui docte ise iv itdptetel m Sce tabu Cese nt stai d 47 LoT NINE Panel PONES drat periti agde voir Eg t tilde 47 S L2 FO F anel LEDS a A NOIE aa SAE A ATEA 48 3 2 1000 100M Auto Sensing EIIOURI ji ia 48 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Table of Contents 22 Elharmst Delaulb Salts disses renis toda Ud dtd aree arene od pri aso abad 49 SO SEE IMA DEC SIOS A ER iq eda and 49 2 1 Traenscemver Atala ui e eget eme 49 2 92 Tramsceivisr Removal 22 2 ne eic ER ih a ta per TET s nti 50 24 Console Port CONT ii a nati 51 35 ALARM Connector riadas ells 51 36 VDSL CONE ci eirca bra cesa adc a x eda Oca aaa Di Ea c ta ZR Ca ca a NDS 52 Chapter 4 MDF CONNOCIIONO audes ii E NR ERE DI SEE e He Hae haee iu IPIE 53 ad MDF Connections Overview ii oec ccopaie ac t aba e ico Ib EP acad been Anse eanonbe Loan E O CLOS codedeaaceen 53 22 MOF Main Distribution Frame uri Loan d bra Prin 53 ac THER CHE oL E EL LU ea EA E ME 54 Chapter 5 Ponor GONDECUONS See eee o MES 55 5 1 Power Gonnections Qveriew ecrit oe rt d pa rd etia d E Pa tia bre EE ope Ede rd sd 55 5 2 Power Connections RR tedesunuas a 55 Chapter 6 ll A ttr ER 57 6 1 Fan Mamtenance IntrOC bl OPE ricota 57 6 2 Removing and Installing the Fan Module coincida 57 Pari UNS Basic Seling 59 Chapter 7 Introd
228. mation such as fan status You can check the firmware version number and monitor the hardware status in this screen To open this screen click Basic Setting gt System Information Figure 36 System Info a xcu c System Name VES 1624 ZyNOS FAV Version V3 53 BHK 0 b1_date20080814_2 08 14 2008 DSP Code Version 9 07 15 Hardware Version AAB Serial Number 5080232005198 Ethernet Address 00 1 9 cb d1 96 4e Hardware Monitor M Enable Temperature Unit C 7 Temperature C Current MAX MIN Average Threshold Low Threshold Hi Status 1 35 35 32 32 55 99 Normal 2 32 34 30 30 55 94 Normal 3 36 36 33 33 55 84 Normal Voltage Current MAX MIN Average Threshold Low Threshold Hi Status 1 Qu AUTE 3305 3330 3 102 3 498 Normal 2 13 339 13 339 13 339 13 339 12 150 14 850 Normal 3 1 256 1 256 1 256 1 256 1125 1 375 Normal 4 1 259 1 259 1 259 1 259 1 080 1 320 Normal H 1 861 1 861 1 861 1 861 1 620 1 980 Normal Fan Speed RPM Current MAX MIN Average Threshold Low Threshold Hi Status 1 2839 5187 2802 2836 2000 8000 Normal 2 2793 5162 2763 2793 2000 8000 Normal 3 2824 5258 2773 2825 2000 8000 Normal External Alarm Status Name 1 Normal extalm1 2 Normal Jextalm2 3 Normal Jextalm3 4 Normal Jextalma New Name Apply Fan Trap Mode normal y New threshold Apply Index Temperature C Hi Temperature C Lo Volt Hi Volt Fan Hi Fani Lo VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 10 System Information 02 0 00 dl kc f e
229. mbers of the xDSL ports Click this number to edit the port s filter settings in the section at the top PPPoE IP ARP These are the packet filter settings for each port NetBios DHCP V displays for the packet types that the IP DSLAM is to accept on the port EAPOL IGMP displays for packet types that the IP DSLAM is to reject on the port packet PPPoE Only types that are not listed are accepted When you select PPPoE Only appears for all of the packet types With PPPoE Only the IP DSLAM rejects all packet types except for PPPoE packet types that are not listed are also rejected VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide MAC Filter This chapter introduces the MAC filter 25 1 MAC Filter Introduction Use the MAC filter to control from which MAC Media Access Control addresses frames can or cannot come in through a port 25 2 MAC Filter Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application MAC Filter Figure 82 MAC Filter A MAC Filter Accept Mode accept specified MACs but deny others Deny Mode deny specified MACs but accept others Port i MAC COCO Add Cancel Port Mode Active MAC Delete 1 Deny y C 2 Accept y C 3 Accept O L en e a MEL Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 MAC Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select an xDSL port for which you wish to configure MAC
230. n the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures multicasting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the IP DSLAM to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them The IP DSLAM forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured to ports that are members of that group The IP DSLAM discards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it does not know IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your device VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 21 IGMP 21 2 2 IGMP Proxy To allow better network performance you can use IGMP proxy instead of a multicast routing protocol in a simple tree network topology In IGMP proxy an upstream interface is the port that is closer to the source or the root of the multicast tree and is able to receive multicast traffic There should only be one upstream interface also known as the query port for one query VLAN on the IP DSLAM A downstream interface is a port that connects to a host such as a computer The following figure shows a network example where A is the multicast source while computers 1 2 and 3 are the receivers In the figure A is connected to the upstream interface and 1 2 and 3 are connected to the downstr
231. nagement Information Base to configure the RMON thresholds RMON is a standard to show packet statistics Refer to RFC2819 for more information alarmFallingThreshold The RMON values has returned to normal 40 4 SNMP Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application gt Access Control gt SNMP Figure 120 SNMP a XN NP Get Community Set Community Trap Community Trap Destination 1 Trap Destination 2 Trap Destination 3 Trap Destination 4 Trusted Host 0 0 0 0 means trust all Don A Uc o 0 0 0 Porf162 165535 o 0 0 0 Pert iez 1 65535 o 0 0 0 Ponfisz 1 65535 0 0 0 0 Ponfis2 1 65535 0 0 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 82 SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION Up Click Up to go back to the previous screen Get Community Enter the get community which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station Set Community Enter the set community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station Trap Community Enter the trap community which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 40 Access Control Table 82 SNMP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Trap Destination 1 4 Port Enter the IP address of a station to send your SNMP traps to Enter the
232. ncel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 78 SysLog LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable UNIX Syslog Select this check box to activate syslog system logging and then configure the syslog parameters described in the following fields Syslog Server IP Enter the IP address of the syslog server Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 217 Chapter 39 Syslog VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Access Control This chapter describes how to configure access control 40 1 Access Control Screen Use this screen to configure SNMP and enable disable remote service access To open this screen click Advanced Application Access Control Figure 118 Access Control LE Access Control SNMP Click here Service Access Control Click here Secured Client Click here 40 2 Access Control Overview A console port or Telnet session can coexist with one FTP session a web configurator session and or limitless SNMP access control sessions Table 79 Access Control Summary CONSOLE PORT TELNET FTP WEB SNMP Number of sessions allowed 1
233. nd 30a based on each annex specifying spectral characters Annexes A B and C Note At the time of writing the IP DSLAM supports the Annex A with 8a 8b 8c 8d 12a 12b and 17a The following table summarizes the VDSL2 profiles supported by the IP DSLAM Table 16 VDSL2 Profiles In The Device FREQUENCY PARAMETER PARAMETER VALUE FOR PROFILES doc 8a 8b 8c 8d 12a 12b 17a Annex A Maximum aggregate down 17 5 420 5 11 5 414 5 414 5 14 5 14 5 stream transmit power dBm Index of highest supported 1971 1971 1971 1971 1971 1971 4095 downstream data bearing sub 8 5 8 5 8 5 8 5 8 5 8 5 17 6 60 carrier upper band edge fre quency in MHz informative Index of highest supported 1205 1205 1205 1205 2782 2782 2782 upstream data bearing sub 5 2 5 2 16 2 I6D 02 102 12 carrier upper band edge fre quency in MHz informative VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 16 xDSL Port Setup 16 4 6 Impulse Noise Protection INP Short impulses from external sources may cause bursts of errors which could impact the multimedia ex voice video or picture quality VDSL2 supports Impulse Noise Protection INP which provides the ability to correct errors regardless of the number of errors in an errored DMT Discrete Multi Tone symbol 16 4 7 UPBO In a network with varying telephone wiring lengths the PSD on each line is diff
234. ndex This field displays the number of the gateway entry Gateway IP This field displays the IP address of the gateway VID This field displays the VLAN Identifier that the system adds to Ethernet frames that it sends to this gateway Priority This field displays the IEEE 802 1p priority 0 7 that is added to traffic sent to this gateway Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Clicking Delete saves your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 31 2684 Routed Mode VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide PPPoA to PPPoE This chapter shows you how to set up the IP DSLAM to convert PPPoA frames to PPPoE traffic and vice versa 32 1 PPPoA to PPPoE Overview Before migrating to an Ethernet infrastructure a broadband network might consist of PPPoA connections between the CPE devices and the DSLAM and PPPoE connections from the DSLAM to the Broadband Remote Access Server BRAS The following figure shows a network example Figure 102 Mixed PPPoA to PPPoE Broadband Network Example PPPoA PPPoE BRAS In order to allow communication between the end points the CPE devices and the BRAS you
235. ne 44 1344 303044 0845 122 0301 UK only Fax 44 1344 303034 Web www zyxel co uk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd 11 The Courtyard Eastern Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Index Numbers 100 1000 LED troubleshooting 276 19 inch rack 283 2684 routed PVC VCI 183 VPI 183 802 1p 37 802 1Q 37 802 1x 38 auto 170 force authorized 170 force unauthorized 170 802 3ad 237 A access control 219 number of sessions allowed 219 types 219 Access Router AR 241 actual rate of DSL lines 104 Address Resolution Protocol see ARP administrator authentication modes 89 default privilege level 89 ADSL SELT ADSL2 fall back 37 Agent Information Field 174 aging time 92 MAC force forwarding 245 ALARM connector pin assignments 288 alarm port connection 51 alarm profile 99 alarm profile settings 121 ALM LED 36 275 ALM LED troubleshooting 275 alternative subnet mask notation 245 American Wire Gauge see AWG Appliation Server AS 241 ARP 158 271 ARP table 271 ATM F5 264 Index attainable net data rate LDM test parameter 266 ToneDiag parameter 267 authentication 38 88 administrator 88 default privilege level for administrators 89 modes for administrator 89 automatically multicast group learning 141 AWG 283 backup configuration 260 band plan 36 bit allocation 127 bits transmitted received per DMT tone 127 blocking communica
236. nfo Circuit ID This field displays any extra information the IP DSLAM adds to PADI and PADR packets in the specified VLAN if the PPPoE intermediate agent is turned on Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Enable to add Enable a vendor specific tag to PADI and PADR packets for PPPoE clients in the selected VLAN s Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Disable to not Disable add a vendor specific tag to PADI and PADR packets for PPPoE clients in the selected VLAN s Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to delete Delete the PPPoE intermediate agent settings for subscribers in the selected VLAN s This also disables this feature for PPPoE clients in the selected VLAN s Select All Click All to mark all of the check boxes Select None Click None to deselect all of the check boxes VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 227 Chapter 41 PPPoE Intermediate Agent VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide MTU Size This chapter describes how to configure the Maximum Transmission Unit MTU for the Ethernet interfaces The Ethernet interfaces discard any packets larger than this 42 1 MTU Size Screen Use this screen to configure the Maximum Transmission Unit MTU for the Ethernet interfaces The Ethernet interfaces discard any packets larger than this To open this screen click Advanced Application
237. o flow control 3 Turn off the IP DSLAM and turn it back on to restart it and begin a session 4 When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press a key to enter debug mode 5 Type atba5 after the Enter Debug Mode message this changes the console port speed to 115200 bps 6 Change the configuration of your terminal emulation software to use 115200 bps and reconnect to the IP DSLAM 7 Type atur after the Enter Debug Mode message 8 Waitforthe Starting XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal 9 This is an example Xmodem configuration upload using HyperTerminal Click Transfer then Send File to display the following screen Figure 156 Example Xmodem Upload 3 xl Folder C Product Filename C Product Firmware bin E Protocol 1K Xmodem y Send Close Cancel Type the firmware file s location or click Browse to search for it Choose the 1K Xmodem protocol Then click Send 10 After a successful firmware upload type atgo to restart the IP DSLAM The console port speed automatically changes back to 9600 bps when the IP DSLAM restarts VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Product Specifications This chapter provides the specifications for the IP DSLAM 54 1 Physical Specifications The IP DSLAM is 19 inch 482 6 mm rack mountable Telco 50 Connectors The IP DSLAM has 2 Telco 50 connectors Connect the two VDSL Telco 50 conne
238. o identify the telephone number of the subscriber connected to this DSL port You can use up to 15 ASCII characters including spaces and hyphens Profile Select a profile of DSL settings such as the transfer rate interleave delay and signal to noise ratio settings to assign to this port Use the Port Profile screen to configure port profiles see Chapter 17 on page 117 Mode Select the port s DSL operational mode Select the mode that the subscriber s device uses or auto to have the IP DSLAM automatically determine the mode to use See Table 22 on page 114 for information on the individual DSL modes Alarm Profile Select the port s alarm profile The alarm profile defines alarm thresholds for the DSL port The IP DSLAM sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when the thresholds of the alarm profile are exceeded see Section 17 3 on page 121 IGMP Filter Profile The IGMP filter profile defines which multicast groups a port can join Select a profile of IGMP filter settings to assign to this port Use the IGMP Filter Profile screen to configure IGMP filter profiles see Section 21 7 on page 147 IPQos Profile Select an IPQoS profile to classify and prioritize application traffic Advanced Feature VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 16 xDSL Port Setup Table 20 xDSL Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Optionmask Click the link to display the following screen where
239. o one connection for each pair for a total of two possible gigabit connections one from each of the two pairs The IP DSLAM uses the mini GBIC transceiver whenever it has a connection 3 2 1 Ethernet Default Settings Speed Auto Duplex Auto 3 3 SFP Mini GBIC Slots The SFP slots can each house a mini GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter transceiver A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver The IP DSLAM does not come with a transceiver You must use a transceiver that complies with the Small Form factor Pluggable SFP Transceiver MultiSource Agreement MSA See the SFF committee s INF 80741 specification Rev 1 0 for details You can change transceivers while the IP DSLAM is operating You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber optic connectors To avoid possible eye injury do not look directly into an operating fiber optic module s connectors Figure 10 SFP Mini GBIC Slots iu SFPE yx sre ACT UU ACT Type SFP connection interface Connection speed 1 Gigabit per second Gbps 3 3 1 Transceiver Installation Use the following steps to install a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module in the SFP slot 1 Remove the dust cover from the transceiver VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 3 Front Panel Connections 2 For transceivers with a flip up or flip down latch close the latch 3 Insert the fib
240. ocol ID which is added together with VLAN including priority tag on traffic By default it is 8100 which means Ethernet traffic This also has the IP DSLAM accept tagged traffic with the same protocol ID but drop tagged traffic with a different protocol ID Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 13 Switch Setup VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide IP Setup The IP Setup screen allows you to configure a device IP address subnet mask and DNS domain name server for management purposes To open this screen click Basic Setting gt IP Setup Figure 42 IP Setup ad LACT NEED Ethemet IP 192 168 1 3 IP mask 255 255 255 0 VLAN ID Priority o 7 Outband IP 192 168 0 1 IP mask 255 255 255 0 Apply IP setting Cancel Default Gateway 192 168 1 254 Apply Gateway setting Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Ethernet This section allows you to configure the IP setup for your IP DSLAM management through in band ports IP Enter the IP address for management of
241. octets long but contained an invalid FCS and a non integral number of octets Rx oversize This field shows the number of frames received that were bigger than 1518 non VLAN or 1522 VLAN octets and contained a valid FCS Rx undersize This field shows the number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long and contained a valid FCS Tx bytes This field shows the number of bytes that have been transmitted on this port This includes collisions but not jam signal or preamble SFD Start of Frame Delimiter bytes Tx packets This field shows the number of packets transmitted on this port Tx multicast This field shows the number of good multicast frames transmitted on this port not including broadcast frames Tx broadcast This field shows the number of broadcast frames transmitted on this port not including multicast frames Tx mac pause This field shows the number of valid IEEE 802 3x Pause frames transmitted on this port Tx fragments This field shows the number of transmitted frames that were less than 64 octets long and with an incorrect FCS value Tx frames This field shows the number of complete good frames transmitted on this port Tx error underrun This field shows the number of outgoing frames that were less than 64 octets long Tx undersize This field shows the number of frames transmitted that were less than 64 octets long and contained a valid FCS
242. od number Add Click Add to save the new rule to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory It then displays in the summary table at the bottom of the screen The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Use this section to look at a summary of all static routes in the IP DSLAM Previous Page Click this to display the preceding page of static route entries Next Page Click this to display the following page of static route entries Index This field displays the index number of the route Name This field displays the name of this static route Destination Address This field displays the IP network address of the final destination Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination Gateway Address This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your device that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes Delete Select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check boxes in the Delete column VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Alar
243. oducts or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Appendix B Legal Information FCC Warning This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause h
244. ology Up to 24 VDSL subscribers can simultaneously utilize a wide range of powerful broadband services 1 2 Applications These are the main applications for the IP DSLAM Internet access multimedia and phone services for Multiple Tenant Units MTU Other applications include telemedicine surveillance systems remote server systems cellular base stations and high quality teleconferencing 1 2 1 MTU Application The following diagram depicts a typical application of the IP DSLAM with ADSL modems in a large residential building or multiple tenant unit MTU that leverages existing phone line wiring to provide Internet access and voice service to all tenants Note that ADSL service can coexist with voice service on the same line VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 33 Chapter 1 Introducing the IP DSLAM Figure 1 MTU Application Internet 1 2 2 Curbside Application The IP DSLAM can also be used by an Internet Service Provider ISP in a street cabinet to form a mini POP Point of Presence to provide broadband and phone services to residential areas that are too far away from the ISP to avail of DSL or PSTN phone service Residents need an ADSL modem for data services connected as shown in the previous figure VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the IP DSLAM Figure 2 Curbside Application Street Cabinet L Je CODO pe L Posse e 1 3 Hardware Features Th
245. om your computer If you are able to ping the IP DSLAM but are still unable to telnet contact the distributor If you cannot ping the IP DSLAM check the cable connections and IP configuration 53 15 Resetting the Defaults 53 15 1 If you lock yourself and others from the IP DSLAM you will need to reload the factory default configuration file Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The user name will be reset to admin and the password will be reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 Resetting the Defaults Via Command If you know the password you can reload the factory default configuration file via Command Line Interface CLI command Use the following procedure 1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software See chapters 2 6 for details Enter your password Type config restore kW ND Type y at the question Do you want to restore default ROM file y n 5 The IP DSLAM restarts Figure 154 Resetting the Switch Via Command ras gt config restore System will reboot automatically after restoring default configuration Do you want to proceed y n gt resto
246. on distribution based on service plans and types of subscription IGMP count is useful for ensuring the service quality of high bandwidth services like video or Internet Protocol television IPTV IGMP count can limit how many channels IGMP groups the subscriber connected to an xDSL port can use at a time If each channel requires 4 5 Mbps of download bandwidth and the subscriber s connection supports 11 Mbps you can use IGMP count to limit the subscriber to using just 2 channels at a time This also effectively limits the subscriber to using only two IPTVs with the xDSL connection To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IGMP gt Counts Setup VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 21 IGMP Figure 76 IGMP Count A IGMP Count Status Bandwidth BandwidthPort Config Filter Port Group Port Info Count Setup Port Active Count Select 1 5 0 15 2 5 0 18 D 3 5 0 18 C 0 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 IGMP Counts LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field shows each xDSL port number Active This field shows whether or not the IGMP count limit is enabled on this port V displays if it is enabled and displays if it is disabled Count Enter the maximum number of IGMP groups a subscriber on this port can join This has no effect if the IGMP count limit is disabled Select Select this and click Active or Inactive to enable or d
247. on ID Peer IP DSLAM SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 45 3 Static Aggregation Example This example shows you how to create a static port trunk group for Ethernet ports 1 ENETI and 2 ENET2 Make your physical connections make sure that the ports that you want to belong to the trunk group are connected to the same destination The following figure shows Ethernet ports 1 2 on IP DSLAM A connected to IP DSLAM B Figure 129 Aggregation Example Physical Connections 45 4 Dot3ad Screen Click Advanced Application gt Dot3ad to open the screen Use this screen to configure IEEE 802 3ad link aggregation settings to group Ethernet ports into a trunk to increase the uplink bandwidth 2 Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group not the individual port VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 45 Dot3ad Figure 130 Dot3ad OLTA Config Status Dot3ad Mode Disable Apply LACP Priority o 0 565535 LACP Timeout Long y Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 97 Switch Setup Dot3ad LABEL DESCRIPTION Dot3ad Mode Select Disable to disable link aggregation on the IP DSLAM Select LACP to use Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP to dynamically create and manage the trunk group Select Static to have the IP DSLAM add the two Etherne
248. on to update this screen Clear Click this button to erase the clearable alarm entries No This field displays the index number of the alarm entry in the system Alarm This field displays the alarm category to which the alarm belongs Condition This field displays a text description for the condition under which the alarm applies Severity This field displays the alarm severity level critical major minor or info Timestamp This field displays the month day hour minute and second that the system created the log Source This field displays where the alarm originated This is either a DSL port number one of the Ethernet ports enet 1 or 2 or eqpt for the system itself Page X of X This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information Previous Page Click this to display the preceding page of entries Next Page Click this to display the following page of entries 48 3 Alarm Descriptions This table describes alarms that the system can send XTUC refers to the downstream channel for traffic going from the IP DSLAM to the subscriber XTUR refers to the upstream channel for traffic coming from the subscriber to the IP DSLAM A V in the CLEARABLE column indicates that an administrator can remove the alarm You can use the CLI command alarm tablelist to display all alarm information on the IP DSLAM Table 106 Alarm Descriptions ALARM CONDITION SEVERITY
249. oncee Wicsmebee li dg eee biodiebec iude RTI GRS ERI Diam Dat Ci DER QiSd UR E alupu bec Ulo gu LEUTE DERE QI dN 62 Foura kp T 62 EA ene nn 66 giu We noel Lita 66 A M A UN 67 PMs 21 iusto sen cass A oa 69 Foure 27 ADSL POR Sal aa 70 Foure 28 VLAN Pott QU ja A AAA A a t Lb ba pads 70 Pius 29 VLAN Pon SOLE israel 71 gius VLAN Emu cra or ao r E Ei AA E S 71 FIQUIS CAMI eR so 71 Figure 32 Configuration Save Successfully av 71 gir A aRe ke shim tean tee Rae alert tam he eek ae ede cae 73 Figure 24 POR Stalstice TESSIDSE ri ads 75 Fig SS POM Sta ISUCS TVDGL e 78 POLINESIA usan p clava bog RHE ee 81 m PEEL E IP T RETI m o LE 85 Figure 39 Usor ACCOUN Ge m 87 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 23 List of Figures FPU A o II o IA 88 Figure 40 Port Isolation with Daisychain Switch Mode Example sse 92 Figure di Switeh SOUD as a 92 Powe geal Raga 110 e A EA ree 95 Pire ds ENET Part Seb aod ter I ppc auto acuti rre de 97 au Ro A Bai POM EXITING qe Re 101 Figure 45 UPBO Resolves Upstream Far End Grosstalk essei oran rectas 102 Figure 46 DPBO Resolves Downstream Far End Crosstalk eeeeeeeeeeeeeennne 103 Faura DAL PON SA 105 Haus IAS FONS ar A dci sad 105 Pigi ADSL SETTORE I da 107 Foue S0 penas BUS aci rta ti 109 Piguet DPBO EPSO CUSTOM ana abes am Po
250. ons to log on to the web configurator 1 Launch your web browser and enter the IP address of the IP DSLAM default 192 168 0 1 for MGMT port or 192 168 1 1 for in band ports in the Location or Address field Press Enter The Login screen appears VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 7 Introducing the Web Configurator Figure 21 Login Enter Network Password 21 x qe Please type your user name and password Site 192 168 0 1 Realm VES 1624 at Wed Aug 20 12 46 04 2008 User Name I Password Save this password in your password list EN 2 Type admin in the User Name field and your password default 1234 in the Password field Click OK The main screen appears This is the web configurator s main screen Figure 22 Home ZyXEL MENU m Basic Setting Xu rmm Advan Application System Up Time O days 22 06 11 Routing Protocol ENET Status Port Name A 1 Up eneti Home El Logout Media Duplex 1000copper full duplex Alarm 2 Down enet2 xDSL Status Mode Up Down stream Interleave Fast Up Time Down i x Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Management Config Save A GS 1 4pZ91 SAA ko loo Im den Joo Ina d lo lt FS Down Poll Interval s 40 Set Interval Stop Port fi Clear Counter Reset 4 A Click the menu items to open submenu links and then c
251. or details about the line quality and channel conditions To open this screen click Basic Setting gt xDSL Line Data gt Line Statistics VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 18 xDSL Line Data Figure 62 xDSL Statistics Line Rate Info 1216 1961 2793 3907 Pot 3 Y a ESPERO Line Data Line Performance port 3 xDSL line bandplan bandplan US 0 63 880 1196 1981 2751 Items linebandplan y Show Data Line Statistics lear End Show Graph The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 xDSL Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Select a port number on which you want to display related line statistics Items Select one of the following items and click Show Data to display the statistics Show Data result in this screen Select linebandplan to see the line s band plan arrangement for upstream and downstream transmissions Select linegain to see the line s gain values per tone measured for upstream and downstream transmissions Selectlinehlog Channel Transfer Function per sub carrier to see the line s capability against attenuation The format provides magnitude values in a logarithmic scale Select linegln Quiet Line Noise per sub carrier to analyze crosstalk on the line Select linesnr Signal to Noise Ratio per sub carrier to see the line s signal strength level by calculating the ratio between the received signal power and th
252. ority o 2 deny Aoo camen ACL Profile List Index ACL Profile Select Delete Select An None 210 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 36 ACL The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 74 ACL Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the ACL profile The name can be 1 31 printable ASCII characters long Spaces are not allowed Rule Select which type of rule to use Note The lower the number 1 17 the higher the priority the rule has Provide additional information required for the selected rule Additional rules consist of one or more of the following criteria ethernet type Enter the 16 bit EtherType value between 0 and 65535 vlan Enter a VLAN ID between 1 and 4094 source mac Enter the source MAC address dest mac Enter the destination MAC address priority Select the IEEE 802 1p priority protocol Select the IP protocol used protocol type Enter the IP protocol number between 0 and 255 used source ip Enter the source IP address and subnet mask in dotted decimal notation dest ip Enter the source IP address and subnet mask in dotted decimal notation udp tcp Select a type of traffic UDP or TCP protocol for the rule source port Enter the source port or range of source ports dest port Enter the destination port or range of destination ports Action Select which action s
253. ormation the IP DSLAM has learned about DHCP packets This resets every counter in this screen VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 2684 Routed Mode This chapter shows you how to set up 2684 routed mode service 31 1 2684 Routed Mode Use the 2684 formerly 1483 routed mode to have the IP DSLAM add MAC address headers to 2684 routed mode traffic from a PVC that connects to a subscriber device that uses 2684 routed mode You also specify the gateway to which the IP DSLAM sends the traffic and the VLAN ID tag to add See RFC 2684 for details on routed mode traffic carried over AAL type 5 over ATM Use the 2684 Routed PVC Screen to configure PVCs for 2684 routed mode traffic Use the 2684 Routed Domain Screen to configure domains for 2684 routed mode traffic The domain is the range of IP addresses behind the subscriber s device the CPE or Customer Premises Equipment This includes the CPE device s LAN IP addresses and the IP addresses of the LAN computers Use the RPVC Arp Proxy Screen to view the Address Resolution Protocol table of IP addresses of CPE devices using 2684 routed mode and configure how long the device is to store them Use the 2684 Routed Gateway Screen to configure gateway settings For upstream traffic Since the subscriber s device will not send out a MAC address after the IP DSLAM reassembles the Ethernet packets from the AAL5 ATM cells the IP DSLAM will append the routed mode gateway s MAC ad
254. ou to set the system time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your device The real time is then displayed in the logs To open this screen click Basic Setting General Setup Figure 37 General Setup a XGnsaEbn NN Host Name ras Location Contact Person s Name Model VES 1624 Use Time Server when Bootup None y Time Server IP Address Current Time is 51 a0 New Timet hh mm ss E Current Date 2008 fe zo New Date yyyy mm dd I ELE Time Zone When synchronizing with time server It will take 180 seconds if time server is unreachable Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Host Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes This name consists of up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are not allowed Location Enter the geographic location of your device You can use up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are not allowed Contact Person s Enter the name of the person in charge of this device You can use up to 31 Name ASCII characters spaces are not allowed Model This field displays your device type VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 85 Chapter 11 General Setup Table 9 General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Use Time Server When Bootup Select the time service protocol that the timeserver uses Not all time s
255. p to 31 ASCII characters spaces are not allowed VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 17 xDSL Profiles Setup Table 23 xDSL Port Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Latency Mode This is the DSL latency mode Fast or Interleave for the ports that belong to this profile Down Up Stream Rate kbps These are the maximum downstream and upstream transfer rates for the ports that belong to this profile Select Select a profile s Select radio button and click Modify to edit the profile Modify Select Select a profile s Select radio button and click Delete to remove the profile Delete The rest of the screen is for profile configuration Name When editing a profile this is the name of this profile When adding a profile type a name up to 31 characters for the profile Latency Mode This field sets the DSL latency mode for the ports that belong to this profile Select Fast mode to use no interleaving and have faster transmission a fast channel This would be suitable if you have a good line where little error correction is necessary Select Interleave mode to use interleave delay when transmission error correction Reed Solomon is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line See Section 16 3 on page 99 for more on interleave delay Up Stream The following parameters relate to upstream transmissions Max Rate Type a maximum upstream transfer rate 64 to 128000
256. pair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Appendix B Legal Information condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact your vendor You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http www zyxel com web support warranty info php Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Appendix B Legal Information VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Customer Support In the event of problems that cannot b
257. path cost to the root the root path cost If there is no root port then this Integrated Ethernet Switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network For each LAN segment a designated bridge is selected This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN After a bridge determines the lowest cost spanning tree with RSTP it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for the connected LANs and disables all other ports that participate in RSTP Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 26 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 83 STP Root Ports and Designated Ports Root Bridge Designated Port for Bridge 1 Bridge 2 D iscarding sr mn a BEE Design ated Port Design amp edPort Designated Port 3 forBridge5 for Bridge 3 for Bridge 4 Bridge 3 Bridge 5 RSTP aware devices exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constructed Bridge 4 In RSTP the devices send BPDUs every Hello Time If an RSTP aware device does not get a Hello BPDU after three Hello Times pass or the Max Age the device assumes that the link to the neighboring bridge is down This device then initiates negotiations with other devices to reconfigure the network to
258. play a Choose File screen from which you can locate it After you have specified the file click Restore conf 0 is the name of the configuration file on the device so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen If you load an invalid configuration file it may corrupt the settings and you might have to use the console to reconfigure the system 49 4 Backing Up a Configuration File Backing up your device configurations allows you to create various snap shots of your device from which you may restore at a later date Click Management gt Maintenance gt Backup Text Configuration In the prompted File Download screen click Save and choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer BS See the chapters on commands to edit the configuration text file VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 49 Maintenance BS You can change the dat file to a txt file and still upload it back to the IP DSLAM 49 5 Load Factory Defaults Use this function to clear all device configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults BES Restoring the default configuration deletes all the current settings It is recommended to back up the configuration file before restoring the def
259. pport the combined weight of all the equipment it contains VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation gt Make sure the position of the IP DSLAM does not make the rack unstable or top heavy Take all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit e Use a 2 Phillips screwdriver to install the screws See Chapter 54 on page 283 for the hardware that is required to mount the IP DSLAM Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit Do not block the ventilation holes Leave space between IP DSLAM when stacking 2 3 2 2 Rack Mounted Installation Procedure 1 Align one bracket with the holes on one side of the IP DSLAM and secure it with the bracket screws smaller than the rack mounting screws 2 Attach the other bracket in a similar fashion Figure 7 Attaching Mounting Brackets and Screws 3 After attaching both mounting brackets position the IP DSLAM in the rack by lining up the holes in the brackets with the appropriate holes on the rack Secure the IP DSLAM to the rack with the rack mounting screws VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation Figure 8 Rack Mounting te BGB po o pao c c S AS D Q D DDDDUQ0 _00 N 000 000 OT VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Front Panel Connections This chapter
260. ption82 Sub option1 This field displays whether or not the IP DSLAM adds the originating port numbers and any additional information to DHCP requests in the selected VLAN Option82 Sub This field displays whether or not the IP DSLAM adds the sub option 2 and any option2 additional information to DHCP requests in the selected VLAN Delete Select the check box next to the VLAN ID and click Delete to remove the entry Select All Click this to select all entries in the Server List Select None Click this to un select all entries in the Server List VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide DHCP Snoop This chapter shows you how to set up DHCP snooping settings on the subscriber ports 30 1 DHCP Snoop Overview DHCP snooping prevents clients from assigning their own IP addresses The IP DSLAM can store every ADSL port MAC address IP address tuple offered by the DHCP server Then it only forwards packets from clients whose MAC address and IP address are recorded Packets from unknown IP addresses are dropped In some cases you might want to allow packets from an IP address not offered by the DHCP server This might apply for example when a device uses a static IP address In this case you can specify the IP address whose packets are allowed and the IP DSLAM forwards these packets as well 30 2 DHCP Snoop Screen Use this screen to activate or deactivate DHCP snooping on each port To open this screen
261. racters long Spaces are not allowed VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Port This field displays each port number Control Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this multicast VLAN Use the Select All button to include every port Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this multicast VLAN Use the Select All button to include every port Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN ID Use the All button to include every port Use the None button to clear all of the ports check boxes Add Click Add to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh 23 4 MVLAN Group Screen Use this screen to configure ranges of multicast IP addresses for each multicast VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application Multicast VLAN MVLAN Group VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 23 Multicast VLAN Figure 80 MVLAN Group ED MYLAN Group MVLAN Status MVLAN ID Index Start Multicast IP End Multicast IP MVLAN ID Name State Entry Index 1 MYLAN Setup 100 y
262. raffic centrally on AR or AR2 Figure 135 MAC Force Forwarding Configuration Example 3 au D MAC Force Forwarding MACFF ARP Proxy Index VID 200 ARIAS IP 192 168 1 253 SRC IP 192 168 1 200 NetMask 27 1 32 Apply Cancel Index VID AR AS IP SRC IP 1 100 192 168 1 254 192 158 1 0 Dotes Mask IP 255 255 255 240 Select r Select All None 46 3 MACFF Screen Click Advanced Application gt MACFF to open the screen Use this screen to configure the MAC force forwarding settings VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 46 MAC Force Forwarding Figure 136 MAC Force Forwarding Index anu ND MAC Force Forwarding ARIAS IP 0 0 0 0 SRC IP 0 0 0 0 NetMask 0 1 32 MACFF ARP Proxy mH b Apply Cancel AR AS IP SRC IP Mask IP Select Delete Select an None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 100 MAC Force Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Index Select an index number for the rule you want to configure below This index number determines the order in which the IP DSLAM checks the rules VID Enter the VLAN ID of the subscribers for which you are configuring this rule AR AS IP Enter an AR Access Router or AS Application Server IP address Note This router or server should also be a member of the specified VLAN SRC IP Enter a possible source IP address of your subscriber d
263. ration The Default Gateway default is 192 168 1 254 is used when outgoing traffic needs to be forwarded to another network 3 Use this screen to change the IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP address for your network If you change the IP address of the IP DSLAM after you click Apply IP setting you have to use the new IP address to log into the web configurator again 4 Activate a VDSL port for example port 2 for a VDSL connection Click Basic Setting gt xDSL Port Setup and make sure port 2 is enabled by default all ports are enabled Figure 27 xDSL Port Setup 1 xDSL PortSetup xDSL Port Setup VC Setup Iv Active Copy Port his hs TT Protile amp Mode ri Virtual Channels Port e In j Active Customer Info enabled enabled I qo enabled 5 Click Advanced Application VLAN VLAN Port Setting make sure the PVID of port 2 is PVID 1 by default all subscriber ports are members of PVID 1 Figure 28 VLAN Port Settings LE VLAN PortSetting__ VLAN Status Static VLAN Settings VLAN Port Setting Port PVID Priority ENET1 1 1 4094 o v ENET2 i 024094 oy 1 1 ay o 7 2 Et o 7 3 l 1 4094 0 4 1 4094 o 5 i 0 4094 o 6 Then you have to make sure the port 2 is a member of VLAN 1 by default all subscriber ports are members of VLAN 1 6a Click Advanced Application VLAN Static VLAN Settings click VID 1 to bring the settings on t
264. rcuit carries multiple protocols with each packet header containing protocol identifying information Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol for example if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs 16 10 3 VC Mux VC Mux is a type of encapsulation where by prior mutual agreement each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 carries IP VC2 carries IPX and so on VC based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical 16 11 VC Setup Screen Use this screen to view and configure a port s channel PVC settings To open this screen click Basic Setting gt xDSL Port Setup gt VC Setup Figure 52 VC Setup OX GEST D gt xDSL Port Setup VC Setup Port 1 y Super Channel O VPI o VCI 0 IPQas Profile DEFVAL y Encap uc j PVID 1 4094 Priority D y Add Cancel Show Port ALL y Index Port VPI VCI IPGos Profile PVID Priority Encap Select 1 D 33 DEFVAL llc eo 2 0 33 DEFVAL llc O ARA Ce we N P NT Index 1 selected Delete No Channel copied copy Paste leo de a VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 113 Chapter 16 xDSL Port Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 VC Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Sel
265. reduce the noise in xDSL transmissions Trellis may reduce throughput but it makes the connection more stable Down Stream Interleave Delay This field displays the number of milliseconds of interleave delay for downstream transmissions Up Stream Interleave Delay This field displays the number of milliseconds of interleave delay for upstream transmissions Down Stream Output Power This field displays the amount of power that this port is using to transmit to the subscriber s xDSL modem The total output power of the transceiver varies with the length and line quality The farther away the subscriber s xDSL modem or router is or the more interference there is on the line the more power is needed Up Stream Output Power This field displays the amount of power that the subscriber s xDSL modem or router is using to transmit to this port The total output power of the transceiver varies with the length and line quality The farther away the subscriber s xDSL modem or router is or the more interference there is on the line the more power is needed Down Stream Inp This field displays the number of impulse noise protection DMT symbols in downstream transmissions Up Stream Inp This field displays the number of impulse noise protection DMT symbols in upstream transmissions Info xtur Info xtuc The Info xtur fields show data acquired from the xTUR xDSL Termination Unit Remote in
266. resh MVLAN ID Select the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN for which you want to look at or remove the multicast IP addresses currently added to it Name This field displays the name of this multicast VLAN State This field shows whether this multicast VLAN is active Enable or inactive Disable Entry Index This field displays the index number of each multicast VLAN group the range of multicast IP addresses configured for this multicast VLAN Start Multicast IP This field displays the beginning of this range of multicast IP addresses End Multicast IP This field displays the end of this range of multicast IP addresses Select Select this and click Delete to remove the multicast VLAN group Delete Click this to remove the selected multicast VLAN groups Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Packet Filtering This chapter describes how to configure the Packet Filter screen 24 1 Packet Filter Screen Use this screen to set which types of packets the IP DSLAM accepts on individual xDSL ports To open this screen click Advanced Application gt Filtering Figure 81 Packet Filter OZ sqm Port 1 y PPPoE Only PPPoE M Pass through IP M Pass through ARP Iv Pass through NetBios M Pass through DHCP IV Pass through EAPOL M Pass through IGMP Iv Pass through Add Cancel V Passthrough Filter out Don t care Port PPPoE I
267. ress information from your network and improves the network bandwidth usage performance An example is shown next MAC force forwarding is disabled at the left A is a subscriber who sends an ARP request to ask a server s S MAC address All subscribers router AR and S receive a copy from the IP DSLAM D S then replies to A s request A and S communicate directly for further data transmission In this case all subscribers in the network can know the servers MAC address information However with MAC force forwarding enabled as shown next at the right D will reply to A s ARP request with AR s MAC address A sends traffic to AR AR forwards the traffic to S In this case none of the subscribers can know S s MAC address Figure 132 MAC Force Forwarding VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 46 MAC Force Forwarding 46 2 MAC Force Forwarding Examples In your network you have the following IP assignments Table 99 MAC Force Forwarding Example IP Address Settings HOSTS VLAN IP ADDRESS subscribers 1 8 100 192 168 1 10 192 168 1 18 subscribers 9 24 200 192 168 1 200 192 168 1 216 server S 100 150 200 192 168 1 250 access router AR 1 100 192 168 1 254 access router 2 AR2 1 100 150 200 192 168 1 253 Example 1 Source is a Single IP If you want to force all traffic sent between subscriber 1 and the server S through AR you can have the following settings in the Advan
268. riber VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 29 DHCP Relay The slot ID port number VPI VCI and MAC are separated from each other by a forward slash colon or period An example is SYSNAME atm 0 10 0 33 Table 55 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID Sub option Format TR 101 for VDSL 1 N hostname A IP eth SlotiD PortNo Table 56 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID Sub option Format TR 101 for ADSL 1 N hostname A IP atm PortNo ver ver TR 101 uses the same remote ID sub option format as the Private format 29 2 2 Private Format The DHCP relay agent information feature adds an Agent Information field to the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of DHCP request frames that the IP DSLAM relays to a DHCP server The Agent Information field that the IP DSLAM adds contains an Agent Circuit ID sub option that includes the port number VLAN ID and optional information about the port where the DHCP request was received The following figure shows the format of the Agent Circuit ID sub option The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub option The length N gives the total number of octets in the Agent Information Field If the configuration request was received on an xDSL port a 6 byte IP DSLAM s MAC address is added The last field A can range from 0 to 24 bytes and is optional information that you specify abou
269. ridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same in Our bridge ID if the IP DSLAM is the root switch VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 26 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Table 50 RSTP Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Topology change This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured times Time since change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Cost to root This is the path cost from the root port on this switch to the root switch Root port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the switch through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree 0x0000 displays when this device is the root switch Root max age second This is the maximum time in seconds the root switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Root hello time second This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a configuration message The root bridge determines Hello time Max age and Forwarding delay Root forward delay second This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Max age second This is the maximum time in seconds the IP DSLAM can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Hello time second This
270. ring configuration saving configuration to flash The IP DSLAM is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default user name of admin and the default password of 1234 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 53 Troubleshooting 53 15 2 Uploading the Default Configuration File If you forget your password or cannot access the IP DSLAM you will need to reload the factory default configuration file Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The password will also be reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 ES Uploading the factory default configuration file erases the IP DSLAM s entire configuration Obtain the default configuration file unzip it and save it in a folder Use a console cable to connect a computer with terminal emulation software to the IP DSLAM s console port Turn the IP DSLAM off and then on to begin a session When you turn on the IP DSLAM again you will see the initial screen When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press any key to enter debug mode To upload the configuration file do the following 1 Type atlcafter
271. rmance Screen These counters display line performance data that has been accumulated since the system started The definitions of near end far end are always relative to the xTU C xDSL Termination Unit Central Office xTU C refers to downstream traffic from the IP DSLAM xTU R xDSL Termination Unit Remote refers to upstream traffic from the subscriber To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Line Data Line Performance VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 18 xDSL Line Data Figure 61 xDSL Performance a ENEE Port 3 y Refresh Line Rate Info Line Data Line Performance Line Statistics Port Name Line Type Interleave Only Init 1 XTUC XTUR ES 0 0 XTUC XTUR SES 0 0 XTUC XTUR UAS 0 0 Performante xTUC XTUR LPR 0 since lastlink XTUC XTUR LOFS 0 0 up XTUC XTUR LOSS 0 0 XTUC XTUR LOLS 0 Interleaved FEBE 0 Far End CRC Interleaved NEBE 0 Near End CRC Interleaved FEFEC O Far End Corrected FEC Interleaved NEFEC 0 Near End Corrected FEC 15 min history lofs loss lols Iprs es init ses uas Current XTUC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XTUR 0 0 0 0 0 Previous 1 XTUC 0 0 0 1 0 0 XTUR 0 0 0 Previous 2 XTUC 0 0 0 0 0 0 XTUR 0 0 0 0 Previous 3 XTUC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XTUR 0 0 0 0 Previous 4 XTUC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XTUR 0 0 0 0 0 1 day history lofs loss lols Iprs es init ses uas Current XTUC 0 0 0 1 0 0 XTUR 0 0 0 0 0 0 Previous XTUC D 0 0 0
272. rt Setup An example is shown next VDSL Line 1 and ADSL Line 2 are in the same binder Crosstalk occurs when the ADSL signal flows from CO B and is near to CO A s ONU Optical Network Unit location Besides higher Line 1 PSD causes higher interference to the Line 2 CPE B receives signal with higher attenuation With DPBO enabled on the CO A it decreases the PSD level and reduces the crosstalk impact on other service lines Figure 46 DPBO Resolves Downstream Far End Crosstalk ARA ADSL ADSL CO B Line2 600m CPE B VDSL VDSL No DPBO PAN e ee 16 4 9 DPBO Electrical Length The distance between a cabinet and the central office is an important parameter of DPBO settings as we mentioned in the Section 16 4 8 on page 102 The electrical length is used instead of the real physical distance according to G 997 1 format Depending on the cable type the line used and physical line length you can calculate the electrical length in dB For example the distance is 1 kilometer and you use 24 AWG cable type the electrical length 20 5 dB is suggested to used The following table displays the calculation from a real length to an electrical length Table 17 Real Length to Electrical Length CABLE TYPE REAL LENGTH TO ELECTRICAL LENGTH A B Cc 22 ANG 16 2 cable length in kilometer 0 0 0 24 ANG 20 5 cable length in kilometer 0 1 0 26 AWG 25 8 cable length in kilometer 0 1 0039065 0 0039065
273. s any additional information specified in the Info field Clear this if you do not want the IP DSLAM to add a vendor specific tag to PADI and PADR packets from PPPoE clients in the specified VLAN VLAN ID Enter the source VLAN ID for which the PPPoE intermediate agent settings apply Enter 0 if you want to configure the default settings for all VLAN Option Mode Select either Private or TR 101 PPPoE Intermediate Agent sub option Info Circuit ID Enter any extra information the IP DSLAM adds to PADI and PADR packets in the specified VLAN You can enter up to 23 printable ASCII characters or spaces Add Click Add to save the settings The settings then display in the summary table at the bottom of the screen Clicking Add saves your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh Index This field displays the index number of the entry VLAN ID This field displays the source VLAN ID for which the PPPoE intermediate agent settings apply Enable This field displays whether or not the IP DSLAM adds a vendor specific tag to PADI PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation and PADR PPPoE Active Discovery Request packets from PPPoE clients in the specified VLAN I
274. s connection speed is set to match that of the port on the peer Ethernet device When an Ethernet port is set to Auto the IP DSLAM tries to make a fiber connection first and does not attempt to use the RJ 45 port if the fiber connection is successful Check the Ethernet cable and connections between the 100 1000 Ethernet port and the peer Ethernet device Use 1000Base T 4 pair 8 wire UTP Cat 5 Ethernet cables with the RJ 45 interface Make sure that the peer Ethernet device is functioning properly If the Ethernet cable and peer Ethernet device are both OK and the LEDs still stay off there may be a problem with the port Contact the distributor 53 5 100 1000 Ethernet Port Data Transmission The Ethernet port s LED is on but data cannot be transmitted Table 122 Troubleshooting Data Transmission STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Make sure that the Ethernet port has the appropriate mode setting Make sure that the IP DSLAM s IP settings are properly configured Check the VLAN configuration AIO m Ping the IP DSLAM from a computer behind the peer Ethernet device 276 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 53 Troubleshooting Table 122 Troubleshooting Data Transmission continued STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 5 If you cannot ping check the Ethernet cable and connections between the Ethernet port and the Ethernet switch or router 6 Check the switch mode In dai
275. s of the device from which this incoming frame came Refresh Click Refresh to update the list of dynamically learned MAC addresses Flush Click Flush to remove all of the dynamically learned MAC address entries from the MAC table 270 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide ARP Table This chapter describes the ARP Table 52 1 Introduction to ARP Table Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 52 1 1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the device the device s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address sends it to the device If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The device fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the device puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FE FE FE FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows
276. s port VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 19 VLAN Table 32 VLAN Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Copy port Do the following to copy settings from one port to another port or ports Paste 1 Select the number of the port from which you want to copy settings 2 Click Paste and the following screen appears 3 Select to which ports you want to copy the settings Use All to select every port Use None to clear all of the check boxes 4 Click Apply to paste the settings Figure 66 Select Ports y Web Configurator ras 192 168 100 Please select ports and click apply button 8 309 3 WD E 77 S 38 1 9 0 Brot t o s t 1 9 FT 4 48 3 T3 O E T3 Tj 20 24 3 L1 Di D select MI None Apply Cancel VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Protocol VLAN 20 1 Protocol based VLAN With protocol based VLAN PVLAN 802 1Q untagged packet will be tagged a VLAN ID based on its protocol Enable this feature on a port when you want to convert the VLAN untagged packets sent from the connected CPE device to VLAN tagged packe
277. s previously mapped changes to Modify Click Modify to edit a profile Delete Click Delete to remove a profile VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 17 xDSL Profiles Setup VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide xDSL Line Data 18 1 xDSL Line Rate Info Screen This screen displays a VDSL port s line operating values Information obtained prior to training to steady state transition will not be valid or will be old information To open this screen click Basic Setting gt xDSL Line Data Figure 59 xDSL Line Rate Info ine Kate Info OE Port 3 Line Rate Info Line Data Line Performance Line Statistics Port Name Down up Stream Rate kbps 85426 58635 Down up Stream Noise Margin db 24 5 7 0 Down up Stream Attenuation db 3 0 1 7 Down up Stream Attainable Rate kbps 150000 61828 Service Mode vdsl2 17a Trellis Encoding On Down Stream Interleave Delay 4 ms Up Stream Interleave Delay 4 ms Down Stream Output power 8 7 dBm Up Stream utput power 12 9 dBm Down Stream Inp 0 5 DMT Symbol Up Stream Inp 1 0 DMT Symbol Rate into xtur vendor id b5004244434d00000000000000000000 xtur version number 7630392e30352e313220202020202000 xtur serial number 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 xtuc vendor id b5004244434d00000000000000000000 xtuc version number 30392e30372e30370000000000000000 xtuc serial number 000000000000
278. sh to display updated information VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 21 IGMP 21 9 IGMP Port Info Screen Use this screen to display the current number of IGMP related packets received on each port To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IGMP gt Port Info Figure 75 IGMP Port Info LE IGMP Port info Status Bandwidth Bandwidth Port Config Filter Port Group Port Info Count Setup Show Port ai y Port Group Count Query Count Join Count Leave Count 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 D 0 0 3 D D DE 0 0 0 0 enetl enet2 0 D 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 IGMP Port Info LABEL DESCRIPTION Show Port Select a port for which you wish to view information Port This field shows each port number Group Count This is the total number of Group packets received on this port Query Count This is the total number of Query packets received on this port Join Count This is the total number of Join packets received on this port Leave Count This is the total number of Leave packets received on this port Clear Click Clear to delete the information the IP DSLAM has learned about multicast groups This resets every counter in this screen 21 10 IGMP Count Screen Use this screen to limit the number of IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content informati
279. ssi ctc rea ee carries ii ada 279 Tapie 120 Tes SOONG TONEL dorsi ocacci mE mU TT 279 Table T30 Wire Gauge des soles eR 283 TUE ToT Euse SCA T TETTE 284 Table 125 Deis SONS snua 285 Table 133 Console Cable Connector Pin Assignments sssssssssseseeeeeee nennen 288 Table 134 ALARM Connector Pin Assignments ssesssssssssseseeesee entrent nnne snnt en 288 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide PART I Introduction Introducing the IP DSLAM 33 Hardware Installation 41 Front Panel Connections 47 MDF Connections 53 Power Connections 55 Fan Maintenance 57 Introducing the IP DSLAM This chapter introduces the main applications and features of the IP DSLAM It also introduces the ways you can manage the IP DSLAM 1 1 Overview This chapter describes the system features applications and specifications of your IP DSLAM The IP DSLAM is an IP based DSLAM Internet Protocol Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer that connects VDSL and voice subscribers to the Internet As a high performance but yet compact platform it can conveniently deliver broadband Internet access and VoIP telephony service over existing POTS telephone wiring to multi tenant units MTUs hospitals hotels schools university campuses and ISPs The IP DSLAM s low cost and easy management make it a perfect DSL provider solution The IP DSLAM platform allows for convenient management and support of VDSL techn
280. structions Before you begin read all the safety warnings in Safety Warnings on page 6 and make sure you follow them Perform the installation as follows 1 Attach the fan dust filter See Section 2 2 on page 41 2 Install the hardware See Section 2 3 on page 42 3 See Chapter 3 on page 47 for instructions on making front panel connections 4 See Chapter 4 on page 53 for instructions on connecting the Telco 50 connectors 5 See Chapter 5 on page 55 for instructions on making power connections and turning on the IP DSLAM 2 2 Dust Filter Installation Before you mount the IP DSLAM take the following steps to install the dust filter 1 Ensure that the side of the dust filter with the magnets is facing the IP DSLAM Figure 3 Dust Filter Magnets 2 Slide the dust filter underneath the dust filter retainer and between the side rails until it is securely fitted on the side of the IP DSLAM VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation Figure 4 Dust Filter Installation 3 Flip the dust filter handle around so it is flush with the rear of the IP DSLAM Figure 5 Dust Filter Handle Use the dust filter to prevent dust from getting into the device and possibly damaging it Clean the dust filter regularly at least once every two to three months in order to have sufficient airflow through the device to avoid over heating 2 3 Installation Scenarios The IP DSLAM can be placed on a desktop or rac
281. sub carriers the DSL connection is using hlinScale The channel characteristics function is represented in linear format by a scale factor and a complex number This is the maximum upstream and downstream scale factor used in producing the channel characteristics function latn This is the upstream and downstream Line Attenuation in dB satn This is the upstream and downstream Signal Attenuation in dB snrm This is the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio Margin in dB A DMT sub carrier s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power The signal to noise ratio margin is the maximum that the received noise power could increase with the IP DSLAM still being able to meet its transmission targets attndr This is the upstream and downstream Attainable Net Data Rate in bit s farEndActatp This is the upstream and downstream Far End Actual Aggregate Transmit Power in dBm a This is the index number of the DMT sub carrier VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 267 Chapter 50 Diagnostics Table 115 ToneDiag Parameters continued LABEL DESCRIPTION logdB This is a format for providing channel characteristics It provides magnitude values in a logarithmic scale This can be used in analyzing the physical condition of the DSL line OLN dBm The Quiet Line Noise for a DMT sub carrier is the rms root mean square level of the noise present on
282. sychain mode if you have a loop topology and enable RSTP it is possible for RSTP to disable Ethernet port 1 the uplink port Note It is not recommended to use daisychain mode in a loop topology 53 6 DSL Data Transmission The DSL link is up but data cannot be transmitted Table 123 DSL Data Transmission Troubleshooting STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Check the switch mode and port isolation settings If an ADSL modem or router is connected to the port check to see that the VPI VCI and multiplexing mode LLC VC settings in the subscriber s DSL modem or router match those of the DSL port If the subscriber is having problems with a video or other high bandwidth services make sure the IP DSLAM s VDSL port s data rates are set high enough Check the VLAN configuration Ping the IP DSLAM from the computer behind the VDSL modem or router If you cannot ping connect a DSL modem to an VDSL port that is known to work If the VDSL modem or router works with a different VDSL port there may be a problem with the original port Contact the distributor 5 If using a different port does not work try a different VDSL modem or router with the original port 53 7 There Is No Voice on an VDSL Connection The IP DSLAM has internal POTS Plain Old Telephone Service splitters that allow the telephone wiring used for VDSL connections to also simultaneously carry normal voice conversations Table 124
283. t 147 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide List of Tables Tae IRE FON SOUD ads ken pla cpu kavrb ade oapda duct a a debo adr ppp d Spb GR 148 TEE ISTE PORE VES sisas i 149 Nie m bNICU desig ae 150 Table 22 Signe ner DD 181 Table AB MYLAN TAUS A ai 154 TAS omi Bl ar 155 TASAS A ER I ra a o ta E Gr edu OG Rd n a rd 156 Table 28 Pues Ele sra aaa 157 BE ra ed 159 TARDES Patas ions nidt rProd das ei SURE Pod Hr NUR avi ai 161 Table SO RS TP Port Sates 162 Tabla 50 FST SAWS sinc nna RA Ro Ue ii 163 BE c EE den er 165 Eie oe LC A NL e 168 TOO ee EA Racer Me RM EMT 169 Tube DL Por QD cue trata nara 171 Table 55 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID Sub option Format TR 101 for VDSL 174 Table 56 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID Sub option Format TR 101 for ADSL sess 174 Table OF DHCP Relay sustos 175 HE c dE UE E I 178 Tube DS DPIGE SNOP Salas rias 179 TM ta OIG Eso dee re ach Gaaanivanteaumndtiegudancicdaaneaeatas 179 eee teed aa D PEL sc in A E A E NA T A AOE AE Aen eati kan A A 183 Table Ge 2854 Rated Doral rniii aa a 184 BE Despite AR FE aian UT 186 TAS O4 2894 Routed GIONE a Castanea aa ai rupi ag E a df 186 Heide wid cuando 190 Table 66 PPPoA to PPPoE SIUS sian spica CPUS DG e POLES c ELE ER ge OG n DERE Fa 192 UE CIEN E ul usa TU 195 TAS DESC to eT m 196 TRADES GE UL ua Avi 199 Table 20 TLS PIS cr 200 Jr FEE c 204 TE TS PS ccs 205 He ES e Es oaia cueda side tec seeder dre
284. t ports into a trunk group Apply Click this to save the link aggregation mode setting LACP Priority Type a number between 1 and 65 535 for the LACP system priority The IP DSLAM with the lowest system priority and lowest port number if system priority is the same becomes the LACP server The LACP server controls the operation of LACP setup Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP The smaller the number the higher the priority level LACP Timeout LACP timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up If a port does not respond after three tries then it is deemed to be down and is removed from the trunk Set a short timeout one second for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible Select either short 1 second or long 30 seconds Apply Select this to save the LACP settings 45 5 Dot3ad Status Screen Click Advanced Application gt Dot3ad gt Status to open the screen Use this screen to configure IEEE 802 3ad link aggregation settings which groups Ethernet ports into a trunk to increase the uplink bandwidth Figure 131 Dot3ad Status LE Dotsad_ Config Status State Members Links Syncs lacp enetl enet2 enetl Refresh VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapt
285. t this relay agent Figure 91 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID Sub option Format 1 N A The Agent Information field that the IP DSLAM adds also contains an Agent Remote ID sub option of information that you specify The following figure shows the format of the Agent Remote ID sub option The 2 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Remote ID sub option The length N gives the total number of octets in the Agent Information Field Then there is the number of the port in plain text format upon which the DHCP client request was received The next field B in the figure is 0 to 23 bytes of optional information that you specify This is followed by the name and telephone number configured for the xDSL port The port number optional information B in the figure xDSL name and xDSL telephone number fields are separated by forward slashes Figure 92 DHCP Relay Agent Remote ID Sub option Format 21 E e 29 3 DHCP Relay Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application DHCP Relay VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 29 DHCP Relay Figure 93 DHCP Relay ED DHCP Relay m VLAN ID o 1 4094 0 for the default server Enable DHCP Relay O Enable Option82 Sub option1 Circuit ID O Enable Option82 Sub option2 Remote ID HE Primary Server IP 0 0 0 0 Secondary Server IP lo 0 0 0 Relay Mode auto Option Mode Private Active Server Primary Apply Cancel Server List Note Th
286. tch the IP DSLAM first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch the IP DSLAM first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports but this can be changed The egress outgoing port s of a frame is determined on the combination of the destination MAC address and the VID of the frame For a unicast frame the egress port based on the destination MAC address must be a member of the VID also otherwise the frame is blocked For a broadcast frame it is duplicated only on ports except the ingress port itself that are members of the VID thus confining the broadcast to a specific domain Whether to tag an outgoing frame depends on the setting of the egress port on a per VLAN per port basis recall that a port can belong to multiple VLANs If the tagging on the egress port is enabled for the VID of a frame then the frame is transmitted as a tagged frame otherwise it is transmitted as an untagged frame 19 3 VLAN Status Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application VLAN VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 19 VLAN Figure 63 VLAN Status VLAN Status Primary Port is ENET1 Page of 1 Index Elapsed Time Status 1 1 days 4 00 46 Static o Poll Interval s Change Pages c OX ERE
287. te Click this to remove the OUI filter from the port Apply Click Apply to save the changes in this screen to the system s volatile memory The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide N1MAC 44 1 Overview NIMAC is multiple to one MAC address conversion NIMAC allows the IP DSLAM A to replace the MAC addresses of subscriber xDSL modems S with the IP DSLAM s MAC address in upstream packets This removes the need to maintain a big MAC address table and prevents MAC spoofing attacks on central devices behind the IP DSLAM In this example NIMAC is enabled on ports 1 3 and 5 for traffic forwarded from three VDSL modems A replaces subscriber xDSL modem MAC addresses MAC1 MAC2 and MAC3 with its MAC address MAC A on a frame forwarded to the backbone network B Backbone devices only see a frame from A and record only A s MAC address in their MAC tables Figure 126 N1TMAC MAC MAC2 MAC3 44 2 N1MAC Screen Use this screen to enable or disable NIMAC on xDSL subscriber ports To open this screen click Advanced Application NIMAC VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 233 Chapter 44 NTMAC Figure 127 N1MAC A NU CNN N1Mac N1Mac Status System MAC 00 19 cb d1 96 50 Port Active 1 i
288. tem status link status rates statistics counters Temperatures voltage reports and alarms DMT Modulation The IP DSLAM with the VDSL modem such as P 870H 51 or P 870HW 51 offers service providers a DMT Discrete Multi Tone based VDSL solution DMT modulation allows the IP DSLAM to dynamically adapt to the bit rate based on the line condition Band Plan Support Band plan is controlled by Limit PSD Mask refer to Section 16 4 2 on page 100 All options of Limit PSD Mask for this IP DSLAM follow the band plan defined in G 993 2 The IP DSLAM supports VDSL band Plan VDSL Profiles Profiles allow you to configure VDSL ports efficiently You can configure all of the VDSL ports with the same profile thus removing the need to configure the VDSL ports one by one You can also change an individual VDSL port by assigning it a different profile The Product Name long supports the VDSL2 profiles including 8a 8b 8c 8d 12a 12b and 17a The DS1 frequency band of the 17a profile starts at 138 kHz and the edge frequency of the upper band of the 17a profile is 17 664 MHz The VDSL2 profiles are programmable and automatically adapt according to the line condition of each VDSL2 line VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the IP DSLAM IP Protocols P Host No routing Telnet for configuration and monitoring SNMP for management SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 SNMP v1 RFC 1157 SNMPv2 SNMPv2c or later version
289. than or equal to the maximum upstream signal to noise margin Down Shift SNR The upstream down shift signal to noise margin 0 31 dB When the channel s signal to noise margin goes below this number the device shifts to a lower transfer rate Configure the upstream down shift signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the target upstream signal to noise margin and greater than or equal to the minimum upstream signal to noise margin Down Stream The following parameters relate to downstream transmissions VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 17 xDSL Profiles Setup Table 23 xDSL Port Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Max Rate Type a maximum downstream transfer rate 64 to 128000 Kbps bps for this port Configure the maximum downstream transfer rate to be greater than the maximum upstream transfer rate Min Rate Type the minimum downstream transfer rate 32 to 128000 Kbps for this port Configure the minimum downstream transfer rate to be less than the maximum downstream transfer rate Interleave Delay Configure this field when you set the Latency Mode field to interleave Type the number of milliseconds 1 255 of interleave delay to use for upstream transfers It is recommended that you configure the same latency delay for both upstream and downstream Max SNR Type the maximum downstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Min SNR Type the minimum downstream signa
290. the Enter Debug Mode message 2 Wait for the Starting XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal 3 This is an example Xmodem configuration upload using HyperTerminal Click Transfer then Send File to display the following screen Figure 155 Example Xmodem Upload Folder C Product Filename C Product config rom E Protocol 1K Xmodem h Send Close Cancel Type the configuration file s location or click Browse to search for it Choose the 1K Xmodem protocol Then click Send 4 After a successful configuration file upload type atgo to restart the IP DSLAM The IP DSLAM is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of 1234 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 53 Troubleshooting 53 16 Recovering the Firmware Usually you should use FTP or the web configurator to upload the IP DSLAM s firmware If the IP DSLAM will not start up the firmware may be lost or corrupted Use the following procedure to upload firmware to the IP DSLAM only when you are unable to upload firmware through FTP ES This procedure is for emergency situations only 1 Obtain the firmware file unzip it and save it in a folder on your computer 2 Connect your computer to the console port and use terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters VT100 terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit N
291. the IP DSLAM should follow when the criteria are satisfied rate Select this and enter the maximum bandwidth this traffic is allowed to have new vlan Select this and enter the VLAN identifier you want to use for the matched traffic new priority Select the IEEE 802 1p priority to use for this traffic deny Select this if you want the IP DSLAM to reject this kind of traffic ACL Profile List Index This field displays a sequential value The sequence in this table is not important Click this to edit the associated ACL profile in the section above ACL Profile This field displays the name of this ACL profile Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to Delete remove the entry Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 36 ACL 36 4 ACL Profile Map Screen Use this screen to look at all the ACL profiles and the PVCs to which each one is assigned To open this screen click Advanced Application gt ACL gt ACL Profile Map Figure 114 ACL Profile Map abren ACL Profile List All y Index D ACL Setup ACL Profile ACL Port Map Profile Port VPINCI The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 75 ACL Profile Map LABEL DESCRIPTION ACL Profile EM the ACL profile s for which you want
292. the labels in this screen Table 108 Alarm Event Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of the alarm in the list Click this link to specify the severity level of an alarm s and where the system is to send the alarm s See Section 48 5 1 on page 256 Alarm This field displays the alarm category to which the alarm belongs dsl represents Digital Subscriber Line DSL alarms enet represents Ethernet alarms eqpt represents equipment alarms Sys represents system alarms Condition Code This field displays the condition code number for the specific alarm message Condition This field displays a text description for the condition under which the alarm applies Facility This field displays the log facility Local 1 Local 7 on the syslog server where the system is to log this alarm This is for alarms that send alarms to a syslog server SNMP This field displays V if the system is to send this alarm to an SNMP server It displays if the system does not send this alarm to an SNMP server Syslog This field displays V if the system is to send this alarm to a syslog server It displays if the system does not send this alarm to a syslog server Severity This field displays the alarm severity level critical major minor or info Clearable This displays V if the alarm clear command removes the alarm from the system It displays if the alarm clear command does not
293. the new port number in the Server Port field If you change the default port number then you will have to let people who wish to use the service know the new port number for that service Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 223 Chapter 40 Access Control 40 6 Remote Management Screen Use this screen to configure the IP address ranges of trusted computers that may manage the IP DSLAM To open this screen click Advanced Application Access Control Secured Client Figure 122 Remote Management Secured Client Setup EH Remote Management Up Secured Client Setup Index Enable Start IP Address End IP Address Telnet FIP Web ICMP SNMP 1 Vv 0 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 iv Iv Iv iv E 2 ri 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C C E 5 3 ri 0 0 0 0 JA 0 O y E Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 Remote Management Secured Client Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Up Click Up to go back to the previous screen Index This is the client set index number A client set is a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a servic
294. the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied 52 2 ARP Table Screen The ARP table can hold up to 500 entries To open this screen click Management ARP Table VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 271 Chapter 52 ARP Table 272 Figure 153 ARP Table Page 1 of 1 Index X ED ARP Table d Flush Total 1 ARP entries IP Address MAC Address 192 168 1 33 00 50 8d 48 59 1f Previous Page Next Page The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 117 ARP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Flush Click Flush to remove all of the entries from the ARP table Total X ARP Entries This displays the number of entries in the ARP table Page X of X This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information Index This is the ARP table entry number IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a port MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the listed IP address Previous Page Click one of these buttons to show the preceding or following screen if the Next Page information cannot be displayed in one screen VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide PART V Troubleshooting
295. this case the subscriber s xDSL modem or router during negotiation provisioning message interchanges This information can help in identifying the subscriber s xDSL modem or router The Info xtuc fields show data acquired from the xTUC xDSL Termination Unit Central in this case IP DSLAM during negotiation provisioning message interchanges A At the time of writing the IP DSLAM always uses Trellis coding 18 2 xDSL Line Data Screen This screen displays an xDSL port s line bit allocation Discrete Multi Tone DMT modulation divides up a line s bandwidth into tones This screen displays the number of bits transmitted for each tone This can be used to determine the quality of the connection whether a given sub carrier loop has sufficient margins to support xDSL transmission rates and possibly to determine whether certain specific types of interference or line attenuation exist The better or shorter the line the higher the number of bits transmitted for a DMT tone The maximum number of bits that can be transmitted per DMT tone is 15 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 18 xDSL Line Data The bit allocation contents are only valid when the link is up To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Line Data Line Data Figure 60 xDSL Line Data Pot 3 E Port Name Port Status link up Line Rate Info Line Data a OFS Sir aD DS1 carrier load tone 0000 0015 00 00 tone 0016 0031 00 00
296. tile BSOPBBII ica 121 Chapter 18 MBSL CNG Dat A X M A C A A 125 TO SL Lms Rate Info SCR OG uiae deii uitds rci Meg eee 125 182 IIL Ie Dala Se UTR 126 19 3 XOSL PIT A NY cri aa nie Crust te blues dant dat Had Bonin adus Eo FR ARV ados 127 184 XDSL SOMOS SOREN e dram ie 129 Part Ill Advanced Application eeeeeeeeeeeee 131 Chapter 19 VRAN 133 pliss Paco AAA oo o 133 18 2 Introduction to IEEE 802 10 Tagged VLAN viii cr eani ink 133 19 2 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames eese 134 TaS VLAN SANUS SERIO airada 134 184 Silio VLAN Sening SOSEN irnom E NA Ea 136 18 5 VLAN Forn Seting SGSN a 137 Chapter 20 misc RING 139 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Table of Contents end PisOlbdssd VLAN Lio tete rit lia ibi 139 20 1 1 The Protocol VLAN Screen eee a a 139 Chapter 21 Pe SP NETT IT INI EET CNINTTSI TE 141 A A E 141 21 2 IP Mullicast Addresses miii a a kot kd te 141 PARIT S ei cel o SUL LE 141 capud c LES S E AA A Tree rerrerrr terre 142 21 3 IGMP Stat s Srogi aia 142 214 IGNP Baie Ez ei cl EET TETUER 143 21 3 Bandwidth Por ost SOREN cerati 145 eRe Cong SOBRE a pati rater dub b cett spas eu Uia bete Qi dob P
297. tings from one port to another port or ports Paste 1 Select the number of the port from which you want to copy settings 2 Click Paste and the following screen appears 3 Select to which ports you want to copy the settings Use All to select every port Use None to clear all of the check boxes 4 Click Apply to paste the settings Figure 90 Select Ports Web Configurator ras 192 168 1 1 cJ m ie Please select ports and click apply button BE Xo ub ee eK SE 533 1 9 4556400500400 18 19 8 TJ EJ 8 T3 EJ D E E 20 24 1 D L1 D VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide DHCP Relay This chapter shows you how to set up DHCP relays for each VLAN 29 1 DHCP Relay DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a DHCP server You can configure the IP DSLAM to relay DHCP requests to one or more DHCP servers and the server s responses back to the clients You can specify default DHCP servers for all VLAN and you can specify DHCP servers for each VLAN 29 2 DHCP Relay Agent Information Option Option 82 The IP DSLAM can add information to DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests You can also specify additional information for the IP DSLAM to add to the DHCP requests that it relays to the DHCP server Please see RFC 3046 for more details Th
298. tion port 92 blocking downtream broadcast packets 213 BRAS 192 bridge ID 163 bridge priority RSTP 165 broadcast downstream 39 C calculating electrical length 103 Canonical Format Indicator see CFI certifications 293 notices 294 viewing 294 CFI 133 changing password 66 channel characteristics function 267 LDM test parameter 266 Class of Service CoS 39 CLI Command 280 CO port 52 Command Line Interface 280 configuration VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Index backup 260 restoring to defaults 261 text file 260 configuration restoring 260 configuration saving 67 configured xDSL rate 104 connection 47 alarm port 51 console port 51 to telephone company 47 console cable pin assignment 287 Console Port 282 console port connection 51 contact information 297 contact person s name 85 copyright 293 CRC errors 79 crosstalk 267 268 curbside application 34 customer support 297 D default privilege level administrators 89 default profile settings 104 default settings 285 device type 85 DHCP 38 158 173 DHCP Relay DHCP relay 175 introduction 173 DHCP relay agent 82 39 DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 173 DHCP snooping 39 diagnostics 263 DiffServ DSCP 39 DSCP to IEEE 802 1p mapping 39 disclaimer 293 Discrete Multi Tone see DMT DMT 36 126 DMT Discrete Multi Tone 102 DMT sub carriers 266 Dot3ad 238 LACP negotiation 240 modes 239 status 239 syncs 240 double tagged fram
299. tion for the outside telephone company lines coming into a building and the telephone wiring in the building Figure 16 MDF Main Distribution Frame Wiring d ax Lox 7 E X E Y NI upper ports J 1 WIS lowerports Connect wiring to end user equipment to the lower ports of an MDF and connect wiring from the telephone company to the upper ports of an MDF see the previous figure Some MDFs have surge protection circuitry built in between the two banks thus do not connect telephone wires from the telephone company directly to your IP DSLAM VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 53 Chapter 4 MDF Connections Use a punch down tool to seat telephone lines into MDF blocks Multiple upper and lower MDF port connections are shown as one line in the following figures 4 3 Telco 50 Cables Telco 50 cables are used for data and voice applications with MDFs Main Distribution Frame patch panels and distribution boxes They can also be used as extension cables Telco 50 cables are made up of 25 twisted pair copper wires Connect a Telco 50 connector to one end of the cable see Chapter 54 on page 283 for pin assignments and connect the other end directly to an MDF alternatively attach RJ 11 connectors and connect directly to DSL modem s Figure 17 Telco 50 Cable with RJ 11 Connectors VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Power Connections This chapter shows you how to connect the IP DSLAM to a power sourc
300. to pass through the IP DSLAM This is useful to reduce the incoming broadcast packets and system load To open this screen click Advanced Application Upstream Broadcast Figure 116 Upstream Broadcast Enable Rate Limit EE Upstream Broadcast r s 32 16384kbps in step of 32 Apply Setting The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 77 Upstream Broadcast LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Click this to enable bandwidth control for upstream broadcast traffic on the IP DSLAM Rate Limit Enter the maximum bandwidth for upstream broadcast traffic in kbps allowed to flow into the IP DSLAM Apply Setting Click Apply Setting to save the changes in this screen to the system s volatile memory The system loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save on the navigation panel and then the Save button to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 38 Upstream Broadcast VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Syslog This chapter explains how to store your IP DSLAM s system logs to an external syslog server 39 1 Syslog The syslog feature sends system logs to an external syslog server 39 2 SysLog Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application gt SysLog Figure 117 SysLog JEDI Enable UNIX Syslog SysLog Server IP 0 0 0 0 Apply Ca
301. total number of Report packets received Leave This is the total number of Leave packets received Number of IGMP This is how many IGMP groups the IP DSLAM has identified on the local Groups network Previous Click one of these buttons to show the previous next screen if all of the Next information cannot be seen in one screen Reload Click this button to refresh the screen Page X of X This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information The first table displays the names of the fields The subsequent tables show the settings of the IGMP groups Index This is the IGMP group index number VID The VID is the VLAN ID on which the IGMP group is created IP Address This is the IP address of an IGMP multicast group member 1 48 enet1 enet2 These columns display the ports that are members of the IGMP snooping group 21 4 IGMP Bandwidth Screen Use this screen to set up bandwidth requirements for multicast channels To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IGMP gt Bandwidth VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 21 IGMP Mode Index Start Multicast IP End Multicast IP Bandwidth Index Start Multicast IP Query Expire time Figure 70 IGMP Bandwidth 6 IGMP Band Status Bandwidth Bandwidth Port Config Filter PortGroup Portinfo Count Setup Default Bandwidth 512 1 100 000 Kbps o 1 10 seconds Apply BE 0 0 0
302. try Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Disable to inactivate Disable the entry Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide This chapter shows you how to set up ACL profiles on each port 36 1 Access Control Logic ACL Overview ACL An ACL Access Control Logic profile allows the IP DSLAM to classify and perform actions on the upstream traffic Each ACL profile consists of a rule and an action and you assign ACL profiles to PVCs 36 1 1 ACL Profile Rules Each ACL profile uses one of 17 rules to classify upstream traffic These rules are listed below by rule number 1 ONO BW ND 9 etype lt etype gt vlan lt vid gt etype lt etype gt smac lt mac gt etype lt etype gt dmac lt mac gt vlan lt vid gt smac lt mac gt vlan lt vid gt dmac lt mac gt smac lt mac gt dmac lt mac gt vlan lt vid gt priority lt priority gt etype lt etype gt vlan lt vid gt 10 smac lt mac gt 11 dmac mac 12 priority priority 13 protocol protocol 14 vlan vid srcip ip 15 vlan vid dstip ip 16 vlan vid tcpludp srcport port 17 vlan vid tcpludp dstport port The input values for these values have the following ranges vid 1 4094 priority 1 7 lt etype gt 0 65535 protocol tcpludplospfligmplip
303. ts This field shows the number of unicast packets received on this port Tx nonuni packets This field shows the number of non unicast packets transmitted on this port Rx nonuni packets This field shows the number of non unicast packets received on this port Tx discard packets This field shows the number of outgoing packets that were dropped on this port The Tx discard packets counter always displays 0 because the IP DSLAM does not discard packets that it sends VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 9 Home and Port Statistics Screens Table 7 Port Statistics VDSL continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Rx discard packets This field shows the number of received packets that were dropped on this port Some of the possible reasons for the discarding of received rx packets are The packet filter is enabled and the packets matched a packet filter e The MAC filter is enabled and the IP DSLAM dropped the packets according to the MAC filter s configuration The packets contained frames with an invalid VLAN ID Errors This field shows the number of AAL5 frames received with CRC errors Tx rate This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx rate This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Tx bytes This field shows the number of bytes that have been transmitted on this port Rx bytes This fi
304. ts which are then allowed to flow into a VLAN tagged switch network for specified traffic You can set different VLANs for different application traffic on a port For example you can define 0806 ARP and 0800 IP on a port Then untagged ARP and IP traffic will be tagged with the specified VLAN IDs The other untagged packets will be tagged with each port s PVID VLAN depending on through which port the packets flow 20 1 1 The Protocol VLAN Screen Use this screen to add or remove a VLAN tag from specific traffic flowing through a specified port To open this screen click Advanced Application gt Protocol VLAN Figure 67 Protocol VLAN A CLAN Port 1 y VPI 0 VID 0 Ether Type 0800 Ex 0800 Priority 0 y Port ALL y Index Port VPI vcl VDSL Frame Mode VCI Add Cancel VID Ether Type _Datete r E Priority Select The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 33 Protocol VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Select which port through which you want apply this protocol VLAN tag to the traf fic flowing VDSL Frame Select this for a VDSL port or clear this for an ADSL port Mode VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 20 Protocol VLAN Table 33 Protoco VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION VPI Type the Virtual Path Identifier for the ADSL PVC This field is available if you clear the VDSL Frame Mode field VCI Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for the
305. ture at this sensor MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor Average This field displays the average temperature measured at this sensor Threshold Low This field displays the lowest temperature limit at this sensor Threshold Hi This field displays the highest temperature limit at this sensor Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Over for those above Voltage The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that can detect and report the voltage Current This is the current voltage reading MAX This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point Average This field displays the average voltage measured at this sensor Threshold Low This field displays the lowest voltage limit at this sensor Threshold Hi This field displays the highest voltage limit at this sensor VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 10 System Information Table 8 System Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point otherwise Abnormal is displayed Fan Speed RPM A properly functioning fan is an essential component along with a sufficiently ventilated cool operating
306. ucing the Web Configurator occccocnncccconnonacnncnnnnnncncnnnncennnnn cnn cocer rre 61 EC ern EE DI PEE LE ETT 61 72 San Privilege Levels T 61 7 3 Accessing the Web COnDfioul ati vs cinc A Last c e dua DK ced 61 Ms rif A bleauaces niaeaeoneniadanpe eve redeobarniadaanetedeounladaisenihian 63 TA SON Tour Passar osea AAA enna pens 66 TO avis QU FCO IMEI an is ERE Esa 67 TA Logging Olt OF he Web RGU IGE sanci n 67 Chapter 8 Initial COHTIBUEGUOR ario A ARA AA 69 8 1 Initial Configuration Overview ooooooocccononococcconononnncnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nn rra nennen snnt 69 92 Mta A 69 12 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 9 ugEa Xg eciticR2 M 73 OO iens cc ha cai ce dt a hg cg usin eck TT DE EUER NC 73 VR ID duci ibi Et 74 d nz DSL Pat oisi ORO usan savin a a du aln aa P if Chapter 10 System Information 81 Chapter 11 Gereral SOI 85 Chapter 12 User ACCOUN A A O 7 T Os A 87 DNE E res EVHI CAE aia 87 122 sa CANON ISSN DD LL ree 88 Chapter 13 co oo e 91 sl Saba corio m p C dT 91 1811 Daisyehain Swen cn m 91 13 1 2 Port Isolation with Daisychain Switch Mode Example sss 91 To ND A SCIRE aaa
307. ult In band Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Default Out of band IP 192 168 0 1 Default Out of band Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Default User Name admin Default Password 1234 Default Console Port Settings VT100 terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no flow control VLAN Default Settings VID 1 802 1p Priority 0 Registration VLAN 1 Fixed for the Ethernet ports and VDSL ports Tagging Untagged for all ports VDSL Default Settings VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 54 Product Specifications Table 132 Default Settings continued Name DEFVAL Latency Mode Interleave Upstream Settings Downstream Settings Maximum Rate 60000 kbps 100000 kbps Minimum Rate 64 kbps 64 kbps Interleave latency Delay 4 ms 4 ms Maximum Margin 31 db 31 db Minimum Margin 0 db 0 db Target Margin 6 db 6 db Upstream shift margin 9 db 9 db Downstream shift margin 3 db 3 db Rate Adaptation Mode Startup Startup Ham Band Plan 0x0000 Custom Notch1 Start 0 kHz Stop 0 kHz Custom Notch2 Start O kHz Stop 0 kHz VDSL2 Profile 6 17a Minimum Downstream INP 5 0 5 DMT symbol Minimum Upstream INP 5 0 5 DMT symbol Limit PSD Mask 2 VDSL Option 0x00000000 enable us bitswaps enable ds bitswaps disable UPBO disable D
308. umber of the user account Click an account s index number to use the top of the screen to edit it Enable This field displays a V if you have the administrator account turned on It displays a if the administrator account is turned off Name This field displays the administrator account s user name Privilege This field displays the administrator account s access level high middle or low Select Select this check box and click the Delete button to remove an administrator account Delete Select an administrator account s check box and click this button to remove the administrator account Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen afresh 12 2 Authentication Screen Use this screen to set up the authentication policies and settings by which administrators can access the IP DSLAM To open this screen click Basic Setting gt User Account gt Authentication Figure 39 Authentication Authentication Mode IP Port Secret Default Privilege Level OEE D User Account Authentication hei2 1455535 ze SCS low m VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 12 User Account The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Mode Select the process by which the IP DSLAM authenticates administrators local Search the local database You maintain this database in the User Account screen radius Check
309. unications going through another switch or router VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 13 Switch Setup Figure 40 Port Isolation with Daisychain Switch Mode Example 3 C Internet 13 2 Switch Setup Screen To open this screen click Basic Setting gt Switch Setup Figure 41 Switch Setup ad Switch Setup MAC Address Learning Aging Time 00 10 10000 seconds 0 Disabled Port Isolation Active Vv MAC Anti Spoofing Active Vv Priority 7 queue 7 gt Priority 6 Queue 6 y Priority 5 Queue 5 y UM Priority 4 queue 4 y Priority Queue Assignment Priority 3 queue 3 z Priority 2 Queue 1 v Priority 1 queue y Priority 0 Queue 2 y Tag Protocol Identifier 8100 Ex8100 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Switch Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Enter a time from 10 to 10 000 seconds This is how long all dynamically Learning learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out Aging Time and must be relearned Enter 0 to disable the aging out of MAC addresses Port Isolation Select this to turn on port isolation to block communications between subscriber Active ports When you enable port isolation you do not need to configure the VLAN to isolate subscribers When you clear this the VLAN Isolation link appears See Section 13 2 on page 92 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 13 Switch Setup
310. ures increased network stability and control over the trunk groups on your IP DSLAM 45 2 Dynamic Link Aggregation The IP DSLAM adheres to the IEEE 802 3ad standard for static and dynamic LACP port trunking The IP DSLAM supports the link aggregation IEEE802 3ad standard This standard describes the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP which is a protocol that dynamically creates and manages trunk groups When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups LACP also allows port redundancy that is if an operational port fails then one of the standby ports become operational without user intervention Please note that You must connect all ports point to point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for LACP trunking LACP only works on full duplex links VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 237 Chapter 45 Dot3ad All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type speed duplex mode and flow control settings Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the IP DSLAM to avoid causing network topology loops 45 2 1 Link Aggregation ID LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information Table 95 Link Aggregation ID Local IP DSLAM SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Table 96 Link Aggregati
311. ut also to provide a network infrastructure that combines guaranteed performance and flexibility in service provisioning System Error Logging The IP DSLAM s system error log will record error logs locally These logs may be viewed again after a warm restart VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the IP DSLAM Management Remote configuration backup restore and firmware upgrade SNMP manageable Text based management locally via console port and remotely via telnet Editable plain text based configuration file PPPoE Intermediate Agent Information Similar to DHCP relay option82 you can set the system to insert line information into client PPPoE Active Discovery Initialization PADI packets This allows a PPPoE termination server to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client Single End Loop Test SELT This feature checks the distance to an ADSL subscriber s location MAC Force Forwarding This feature forces subscriber s to communicate with uplink device s through an IPv4 gateway The gateway then routes or forwards subscriber traffic so the subscribers do not know the MAC addresses of uplink devices on the network A network administrator can monitor monitor traffic on the gateway You can also use this feature to distribute traffic through different routers VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Hardware Installation This chapter explains how to install the IP DSLAM 2 1 General Installation In
312. v 2 ri 3 Li HILARI VS RAN C TN A Apply Select All None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 93 N1MAC LABEL DESCRIPTION System MAC This field displays the IP DSLAM s MAC address used to replace MAC addresses of subscriber xDSL modems in upstream packets Port This field displays the available VDSL port numbers Active Apply Select Active and click Apply to enable N1MAC on specified port s Select All Click All to mark all of the check boxes Select None Click None to deselect all of the check boxes 44 3 N1MAC Status Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application NIMAC N1Mac Status Use this screen to check the multiple to one MAC mapping table for port s Figure 128 NTMAC A ORME NiMac N1Mac Status Show Port All vw Port Type PPP Session ID IP 4 pppoaoe 22 14 ipoa 192 168 1 168 14 ipoa 192 168 10 102 MAC 00 00 16 00 00 37 00 00 16 00 00 42 00 00 16 00 00 42 Clear The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 94 N1MAC LABEL DESCRIPTION Show Port for the port s Select a port or All to display the available multiple to one MAC mapping table Clear Click this to remove all entries shown in this screen VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 44 NTMAC Table 94 N1MAC continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays an xDSL port number
313. vel from 0 to 7 DT Enable Check this box to activate this entry Apply Click Apply to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the IP DSLAM Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Port This is the VDSL port number Enable This shows whether this entry is activated or not S VID This is the S tag VLAN ID outer tag to add to the untagged packets S Pri This is the S tag priority level to add to the untagged packets C VID This is the C tag VLAN ID to add to the untagged packets C Pri This is the C tag priority level to add to the untagged packets Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Enable to activate Enable the entry Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Disable to inactivate Disable the entry VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 35 Double Tagging DT Table 71 DT LABEL DESCRIPTION Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table 35 3 Configuring DT PVC Click Advanced Application gt DT gt DT PVC to display the screen as shown Use this screen to view the existing DT entries It s recommended that you add a new entry in this screen only when you want to translate untagged packets into double tagged ones before forwarding them Figure 111 DT PVC
314. vice In essence RADIUS authentication allows you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location Figure 86 RADIUS Server Client RADIUS Server 27 1 2 Introduction to Local User Database By storing user profiles locally on the IP DSLAM your IP DSLAM is able to authenticate users without interacting 1 Atthe time of writing Windows XP of the Microsoft operating systems supports 802 1x See the Microsoft web site for information on other Windows operating system support For other operating systems see its documentation If your operating system does not support 802 1x then you may need to install 802 1x client software VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 27 Port Authentication 27 2 RADIUS Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application gt Port Authentication Figure 87 RADIUS CE RADIOS ng RADIUS 802 1x Enable Authentication Server IP address 0 0 0 0 UDP Port 1812 1 65535 Shared Secret 1234 Apply C Enable Local Profile Setting Support upto 64 profiles Name Password Retype Password to confirm Index Name Delete 1 admin E The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 RADIUS LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Select this check box to have the IP DSLAM use an external RADIUS server to Authentication authenticate users Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation UD
315. vigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh This table shows the multicast range settings Index This field displays the number that identifies this setting Start Multicast IP This field displays the beginning of the multicast range End Multicast IP This field displays the end of the multicast range Bandwidth This field displays the allowed bandwidth for the specified multicast range Select Select this and click Delete to remove the setting VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 21 IGMP Table 35 IGMP Bandwidth continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Click this to remove the selected settings Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table 21 5 Bandwidth Port Setup Screen Use this screen to set up multicast bandwidth requirements for specific ports To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IGMP gt Bandwidth Port Figure 71 Bandwidth Port Setup CE Bandwidth P Status Bandwidth Bandwidth Port Config Filter Port Group Port Info Count Setup Port Active Bandwidth Select 1 a096 1 100 000 Kkbps r ao96 1 100 000 Kbps a 3 a096 1 100 000 Kkbps r 4 a096 1 100 000 Kbps O AGA ARS mcm a es edd Active Inactive Select _ aut None The followin
316. volatile memory when you are done configuring Index This field displays the index number of a MAC address entry AR AS IP This field displays the IP address of a configured AR or AS See Section 46 3 on page 243 VID This field displays the VLAN ID of the AR or AS MAC This field displays the AR s or AS s MAC address the IP DSLAM has learned Flush Click Flush to remove all of the entries from this MAC ARP proxy table VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide PART IV Routing Protocol Alarm and nent An Static Routing 249 Alarm 251 Maintenance 259 Diagnostics 263 MAC Table 269 ARP Table 271 247 Static Routing This chapter shows you how to configure the static routing function Static routes tell the IP DSLAM how to forward the IP DSLAM s own IP traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually This is generally useful for allowing management of the device from a device with an IP address on a different subnet from that of the device s IP address remote management To open this screen click Routing gt Static Routing Figure 138 Static Routing a CERATI Name AAN Destination IP Address po j IP Subnet Mask A Gateway IP Address s Metric a4 5 Add Cancel Page 1of 1 Previous Page Next Page Destination Gateway Index Name Subnet Mask Metric Delete Address Address Default 192 168 1 254 i 1 172 16 37 0 255 2
317. wisi lO REO iras 254 Figure 141 Alar Event Sell sist Rd rh d aga d Rd 255 Figure 142 Alaim Event Setup Edi aussi e eda ioa Hd eacus a cia ciae dil as da 256 Figure 143 Alq Port SED iode eie te oteic e Ee ER racio e ba esed Nb lees toe ro a eats 257 FR 144 Manten e EE 259 Fue 11 FMa S UDI O anna 259 Figure 146 Restos Conigutaloli sodio 260 Figure 147 Restore Default Configuratii odas il 261 Figure 148 Restore Factory Default Settings Reboot oococcccinnccccnocccinncccnconccnnnancnnonrncnnna conca enne 261 Pigura 149 Fes Ol NAAA MA LEE E Ptr MR tae 262 Figur T5 DUROS aca 263 Figure 151 MAC Table Filtering FIG Watt ai chess rette taie E eo Ra Oca O E aisia 269 aun Ee MAG TARE T 270 Maura Ar Ta ads 272 Figure 154 Resetting the Switeh Via GOmITiBlid usario ii 280 Figure 155 Example XAmodem Upload 1 2 uud euesdu Eg ld 281 Figure 196 Example Amodem Upload atada 282 Figure 157 CO 1 24 and USER 1 24 Telco 50 Pin Assignments sssseseeeen 287 Figure 158 Console Cable RJ 11 Male Connector 1 cr aa Enn oaa conn A 287 Figure 159 Console Cable DB 9 Female Connector sici n ob 288 Figure TED ALARM Connector Pin Layout 12 er pt eir RSS EE bp e reato ad ao e ice dS Ri 288 VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide List of Tables List of Tables Table 1 IP DSLAM From Panal Pons aia 47 Ni LE Ricco ec T E TT 48 Table 3 Navigation Panel Submenu Links e m 63 Table 4 W
318. with range or length errors are also not taken into account Rx broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast frames received of 64 to 1518 octets in length for non VLAN or 1522 octets for VLAN not including multicast frames Frames with range or length errors are also not taken into account Rx mac pause This field shows the number of valid IEEE 802 3x Pause frames received on this VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide port Chapter 9 Home and Port Statistics Screens Table 6 Port Statistics Ethernet continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Rx fragments This field shows the number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long and contained an invalid FCS including non integral and integral lengths Rx error overrun This field shows how many times an Ethernet transmitter overrun occurred Rx error mru This field shows the number of received frames that were dropped due to exceeding the Maximum Receive Unit frame size Rx dropped This field shows the number of received frames that were received into the IP DSLAM but later dropped because of a lack of system resources Rx jabber This field shows the number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets non VLAN or 1522 octets VLAN and contained an invalid FCS including alignment errors Rx error alignment This field shows the number of frames received that were 64 to 1518 non VLAN or 1522 VLAN
319. y 1 Minor y 2 Minor y 3 Minor y ae vum a o ww v o Enet 1 Minor Enet 2 minor y Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 110 Alarm Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This column lists the device s individual DSL and Ethernet interfaces Severity Select an alarm severity level critical major minor or info as the threshold for recording alarms on this port Critical alarms are the most severe major alarms are the second most severe minor alarms are the third most severe and info alarms are the least severe Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide 257 Chapter 48 Alarm VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Maintenance This chapter explains how to use the maintenance screens 49 1 Maintenance Screen To open this screen click Management Maintenance Figure 144 Maintenance GE Maintenance Firmware Upgrade Click here Restore Text Configuration Click here Backup Text Configuration Click here Restore Default Configuration Click here Reboot System Click Here 49 2 Firmware Upgrade Screen
320. you can configure the optional band PSD mask 1 Select which setting s you want to apply to the option mask Select ALL to select every setting and click it again to clear all of the check boxes 2 See the configured result in the Current Option mask is field 3 Click Apply to go back to the XDSL Port Setting screen Figure 50 Optionmask options Web Configurator ras 192 168 1 1 a m E4 ALL Disable Trellis 7 Disable Reed Solomon Disable Upstream Bitswap I Disable Downstream Bitswap F Disable 1 bit Constellation F Disable Transmit Windowing T Disable s 0 5 Support ADSL1 Only Reserved Enable Nitro 7 Enable ADSL2 Annex L TT Enable ADSL2 Annex M FT Enable US PTM optimization TF Enable DS PTM optimization 7 Enable US PHYR TT Enable DS PHYR Current Option mask is 0x0000 RFI Band RFI is induced noise on the lines by surrounding radio frequency electromagnetic radiation from sources such as AM and HAM radio stations To avoid performance degradation due to RFI set the IP DSLAM to not transmit VDSL signals in the RFI band defined by the regulatory bodies such as ETSI etsi or ANSI ansi You can also configure your own RFI bands on the system custom or disable it Limit mask To reduce the impact of interference and attenuation on downstream and upstream transmissions ITU T 993 2 specifies a limit PSD mask that limits the VDSL2 transmitter s PSD VDSL CPE d
321. you replace the VLAN ID for a normal ADSL PVC or VDSL port the IP DSLAM drops the traffic because the new VLAN ID does not match the VID of the ADSL PVC or VDSL port This is illustrated in the following scenario There is a normal ADSL PVC or VDSL port and its PVID is 900 You create an ACL rule to replace the VLAN ID with 901 Initially the traffic for the ADSL PVC or VDSL port belongs to VLAN 900 Then the IP DSLAM checks the ACL rule and changes the traffic to VLAN 901 When the IP DSLAM finally compares the VLAN ID of the traffic 901 to the VID of the ADSL PVC or VDSL port 900 the IP DSLAM drops the packets because they do not match 36 2 ACL Setup Screen Use this screen to assign ACL profiles to each ADSL PVC or VDSL port To open this screen click Advanced Application ACL VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 36 ACL Figure 112 ACL Setup a OEE aD ACL Setup ACL Profile ACL Port Map Port 1 y VDSL Frame Mode D VPI 0 VCI ACL Profile y Apply Cancel Show Port A11 Index Port VPI VCI Type ACL Profile Select Delete Select AIl None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 73 ACL Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select a port to which you wish to assign an ACL profile This field is read only once you click on a port number below VDSL Frame Mode Select this for a VDSL port or clear this for an ADSL port
322. your IP DSLAM in dotted decimal notation for example 1 2 3 4 IP mask Enter the IP subnet mask for management of your IP DSLAM in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 VLAN ID This is the VLAN ID for your IP DSLAM management See Chapter 19 on page 133 for more information on configuring VLANs on the IP DSLAM Priority This is the priority level for your IP DSLAM management 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Outband This section allows you to configure the IP settings for the IP DSLAM management through the MGMT port IP Enter the IP address for management of your IP DSLAM in dotted decimal notation for example 1 2 3 4 IP mask Enter the IP subnet mask for management of your IP DSLAM in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 Apply IP setting VES 1624FT 55A User s Guide Chapter 14 IP Setup Table 13 IP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the above fields again Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway for the in band network in dotted decimal notation Apply Gateway Click Apply Gateway setting to save your changes to the IP DSLAM s volatile setting memory The IP DSLAM loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring

SMG-700 User's Guide V1.00 (Nov 2004)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents